document r§sumi - ericobjeative 1 (see table 1, objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a...

281
. DOCUMENT R§SUMi , ED 227.620 EC 151 065 . TIM& San FrancsCo Infant Program. Final Progress Report, July 1, 1981-June 30, 1982. . . INSTLTUTION San Francisco State Univ., CA. Dept. of*Special Education. SPONS. AGENCY Special Education Programs (ED/OSERS), Waihington, DC. Handicapped Children's Early Education Program. PUB DATE 28 Jun 82 GRANT G007900515 . - NOTE . .320p.. , PUB TYPE Gui-des.- Classroom Use - Materials (For Learner) (051) -- Reports - Evaluatiye/Feasibility (142) EDRS PRICE MF01/PC13 Plus Postage. - DESCRIPTORS Behavioral Objectives; *Child Development; . *Disabilities;- *High Risk Persons; *Home Instruction; 1 *Infants; Instructional Materials; Minority Groups; . Parent Eddcation; *Preschool Children; Preschool Curriculum; Preschool Education; Program Descriptions; Teacher Education- IDENTIFIERS *California (San Francisco) ABSTRACT The San Fran cisco Infant P rogram provides classroom and home educationilprograms for handicapped tor at-risk) infants (0-18) months and toddlers (18-36.months)., parent.training, . preservice and Anservice training, and research_opportunities. The transdisciplinary training focuses on the following skills: gross and fine motor,.cognitive,. communication; self-help, and social: A total:n:4 of 41 children were enrolled during 1979-1982, with about 20 partiapants per year. The program also: 1) established a moderfor the diagnosis, assessment, and'referral of Caucasian, Black, and Spanish-speaking clients; 2) trained parents to deyelop systematic learning actii7ities With their children; and 3) measured infant behaviors and parent teaching skills using standardized tests. The staff includes an infant and toddler teacher, physical and speech therapists, and consultants. In cooperation with San Francisco State, Aniversity, students were trained in atypical infant development, and research projects were designed to validate curriculum programs for handicapped infants. The subitantia1 appenaed materials include: sample infant curricula and a litt of curricular objectives; data on services, training, and other program accomplishments; an individualized education program fotm; data collection forms'for formulating infant educational plans; a master's thesis.on technigueS to train motor responSes with.severely handicapped infants; a description of electronic,toys used to train a Down's syndrome , toddler; a student'training manual for special education (emphasizing severely handicapped and eatly childhood) and a program description emphasizing parent edudation and service.provision to a culturally diverse population. (SEW. Or.

Upload: others

Post on 12-Aug-2020

2 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. DOCUMENT R§SUMi

,

ED 227.620 EC 151 065.

TIM& San FrancsCo Infant Program. Final Progress Report,July 1, 1981-June 30, 1982. .

. INSTLTUTION San Francisco State Univ., CA. Dept. of*SpecialEducation.

SPONS. AGENCY Special Education Programs (ED/OSERS), Waihington,DC. Handicapped Children's Early EducationProgram.

PUB DATE 28 Jun 82GRANT G007900515 . -

NOTE . .320p.. ,

PUB TYPE Gui-des.- Classroom Use - Materials (For Learner)(051) -- Reports - Evaluatiye/Feasibility (142)

EDRS PRICE MF01/PC13 Plus Postage. -

DESCRIPTORS Behavioral Objectives; *Child Development;.

*Disabilities;- *High Risk Persons; *Home Instruction;1 *Infants; Instructional Materials; Minority Groups;

. Parent Eddcation; *Preschool Children; PreschoolCurriculum; Preschool Education; ProgramDescriptions; Teacher Education-

IDENTIFIERS *California (San Francisco)

ABSTRACTThe San Fran cisco Infant P rogram provides classroom

and home educationilprograms for handicapped tor at-risk) infants(0-18) months and toddlers (18-36.months)., parent.training, .

preservice and Anservice training, and research_opportunities. Thetransdisciplinary training focuses on the following skills: gross andfine motor,.cognitive,. communication; self-help, and social: A total:n:4of 41 children were enrolled during 1979-1982, with about 20partiapants per year. The program also: 1) established a moderforthe diagnosis, assessment, and'referral of Caucasian, Black, andSpanish-speaking clients; 2) trained parents to deyelop systematiclearning actii7ities With their children; and 3) measured infantbehaviors and parent teaching skills using standardized tests. Thestaff includes an infant and toddler teacher, physical and speechtherapists, and consultants. In cooperation with San Francisco State,Aniversity, students were trained in atypical infant development, andresearch projects were designed to validate curriculum programs forhandicapped infants. The subitantia1 appenaed materials include:sample infant curricula and a litt of curricular objectives; data onservices, training, and other program accomplishments; anindividualized education program fotm; data collection forms'forformulating infant educational plans; a master's thesis.on technigueSto train motor responSes with.severely handicapped infants; adescription of electronic,toys used to train a Down's syndrome ,

toddler; a student'training manual for special education (emphasizingseverely handicapped and eatly childhood) and a program descriptionemphasizing parent edudation and service.provision to a culturallydiverse population. (SEW.

Or.

Page 2: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

t,

1.13, DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATIONNATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EOUCATION

1TED aTIONAL RESOURCES INFORMATION

CENTER (ERIC)

his documeht has been reproduced asreceived horn the person or organizationoriginatin6 it

Miner changes have been made to improvereproduction quality ._ _ _ _ _

Points of view or opinions stated in thisclocurnent do not necessarily represent official NIEPosition or pole"

SAN FRANCISCO IRFANT pROGRAM

DEPARTMENT OF SPECIAL-EDUCATION,

SAN-FRANCISCO STATE uNIVEgsIty

. SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA

FINAL PROGRESS' REPORT

JULY 1, 1981 JUNE*30, 1982

Handicapped Children's EarTy Education Program

U.S. Department of Education

Washington, D.C.

The Project reported herein was performed Pursuant to

'Grant No. G007900515 from the; U.S. Department of Education.

,The opinions expressed herein do not necessarily relfect the

.position or policy of the U.S. Department Of Education and

no official endorsement by the U.S. Department of.Education

should be inferred.

Page 3: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

The r ort is organized in two sections. Secttep/

I, an overview includes a

brief review of program components and descripti9n of the project's current

1

status. Section 2 details ttie project's.accomplishments over the three year

4

funding period.

OVERVIEW

4,10

PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

S.

Maria S. is an 8 month old severely handicapped chil?who.has visual,

hearing and motor impairments resulting from a viral infectign during her ,

mother's pregnancy. Maria and her mother attend school weekly, Maria's

mother is learning to position And handle Maria in order to help her to eat

from a spbon and to move her arms toward midline. Mrs. S. is excited that

Maria is beginning to hold her.head up and take food frlom the spoori; she is

teaching Maria's older sister to assigt in the feeding. Mrs. S. reports.that.

she likes the school program and home visits because, for the first time,'she

is receiving concrete help in teaching Maria. She also looks forward to

parent meetings since she gets to take a break froM child care and talk with

other parents, a welcome.opportunity. to reeet new friends as her family lives

so fdr away in Mexico.%N.

Lamont is learning to match objects, to take turns in activities. such as

choosing and labeling teys when in a small. droup, to imdtate a_sequence of

movements, and to use words such' as "juice" to tell his teachers and parents ..'

what he wants. Lamont joins his classroom peers (some of whom are develop-

mentally typical and integrated into.the clas'S for delayed toddlers) in

school two times.per week. ,Nii father-attends the programwith him in.order

to coordinate and plamwith the teachers activities which will enhance Lamont's

learning and development. Mr. W. discusses Lamont's education plans with his

weife, who works during the day, so that they can together:implement the

activities in the home. Lamont is a 26 month old Down syndrome child. His

parents hope he.wili attend as normal a preschool and kindergarten program

as possible when he "graduates" from the infant/toddler project.

Maria and Lamont are representative of participants in the San Francisco

Infant Program. The program serves infants and toddlers from birth'to three. .

Page 4: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

a

leears of age who have identifiable disabling conditions (ranging from mild

, to severe handicapping condttions). Families participating in the program

tome from all .socioeconOmic and racial.and ethnic groups (White, Black,'

.Hispanich Asian),representatfve of the San Francisco Population.

The primary goal of the San Francisco Infant Program is to provide

'early interventiOn services for these infants and their families residing '

in the Bay Area.

of.development:..

help and social.

Training is given to children across all behavioral areas,4

.grossmotor, fine.motor, cognitive, Communication, selfn

Parent involvement is encouraged through parent training

/.. and .support groups,

.

.Model Elements

The.San Francisco Jnfant Program Model combines several major tenets or

elements. These elements ihclude: 1) the provision of services utilizingA

a transdisciplinary model, 2) the systematic instruction to children through

a combination of a home and school based Program, and 3) a focus on the

child'sinteraction within the larger environment - the child's family.

The transdisciplinary model used in this context assumes that each staff

or interyption team member,. provides inpui from her/his own area of expertise

in the educational'setting. Input consists not only of individual child

assessment and education planning,.but also the training of" other staff

members" and parents to delivee these special services. For example, the

physical therapist maintains the primary responsibility for assessments and

recommendations regarding children's motor development. In addition, she

,

Page 5: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

trains parents and other team members to position. therapeutidally,and

handle children to facilitate optimal.per'formance and learning in all areas.

She, in turn, has been taught by other team members to write behavioral

objectives for'her teaching programs and to utilize communication facilita-

tion techniques.

The transdisciplinary servicedelivery moael is..timplemented at a program

location dontdted by the San Francisco Unified School District through a

collaborative arrangement with'San Francisco State UniArsity. Infants and

toddlers with their caregivers both attend a school program and receive home

visits periodically. The combtned home and school programs focus on assisting

parents to develop sys'tematic leareng,activities with their children and onN

enhancing the interactions of infants and toddlers with their parents,

siblings and other caregivers.. Thus, intervention is construed as a network

of educational, iriformational and support services for the child and family..

Services to Children

The twenty children participating in the San Francisco Infant.Project

are placed in in§tructional groups on the basis of chronological age.

Infants who'range in age from birth to 18 months are divided into two groups

of five and attend school once a week for three hours with their parent(s)

or primary caregiver (e.g., babysitter, grandparent). Toddlers (18 months -

36 months) attend school two-three mornings per week, accompanied by a

,parent-caregiver.Additionally, allehildren and familtn are visited in

their homes biweekly by staff members.

Child change and development is measured on.two formal instrumpts, the

11

Bayley Scales of Infant Development,and the Uniform Performance Assesment

System (ITAS). Additionally, continuous measurement of-child acquisition

Page 6: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1'7

4

of target goals.is taken on'a criterion-referenced checklist corresponding.

to the program's curriculum objectives (objectiv.es and programs represent a

compilation of existing nationally tested infant/toddler'curricOla)..

)

Services .:to ramilies

Parents are viewed as active participants in'the educational process,

functioning both as pianners and teachers of thOr children. Parents in the

San Francitco Infant Program receive assistance in designing and implementing '

training programs for their children. Parents also are offere'd information on

coMmunity resources and referrals for specialized needs.. Two types of parent

groups are availaple.to Infane,PrOgram participants in addition to the classroom'

component. The focus of one parent group is on providing support and counseling;

the second group meets for workshops on,topics selected by parents. Parent's

respond to a parent "consumer" satisfaction measure twice annually to deliver. .

specific feedback to the staff on program services:,

'Staff

The transdisciplinary team,of the San Francisco Infant Program consists

of the following members: Project Direct, Project Coordinator, Infant/Toddler

Teacher, Physical Therapist, Speech Therapist and Parent Coordinator (part-time)

and medical and psychological consultahts.. Biweekly staff inservice training

sessions are held.

Page 7: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.e

PROJECT STATUS

al

The San Francisco Infant Program pas been funded through the.California

State Department of Developmental Servojces as a vendor fOr the Regional

Center System to provide services.to developmentally disabled infants and

toddlers. As such, the program will continue to fully oper as it has

for the past three years.

The program hqs been recogniAd as a major incant/toddler program in

the Bay Area, particularly as a program which provides services to multi-.

cultural children and families. The training and dissemination activities

begun through the federal demonstration funding are being continued and

represent a unique and major contribution to the Bay Area. The summa6

of program accomplishments is detailed in the following section.

-/

;

Page 8: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

6

4 \

'PROJECT ACCOMPLISHMENTS

Project accomplishments are organized and presented by specific program

c9mponents, Project objectives dnd activities are detailed in Table.l.

All objectives were met as specified i4 the proposed timeline. A. numerical

summary of accpmplishments is provid0 in Table 2.

SERVICES TO CHILDREN

Objeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a

combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-

plished during Year 1. Activities 1'-8 and 12 and Diittames, 1-3 'under Objective

1 were initiated during Year 1 and continued in Year 2.

Year 2 activities focused primarily on expanding the toddler.(18-36

month old) program. During Year 3 the program was expanded.even further to

include two toddler. and twp infant groups.. Emphasis fo'r toddlers was placed

on pre-academic and preschool 1.:eadiness skills so that children were prepared

upon "graduation" for public school preschool programs. Traditiona.1.140,public

school preschools-in the San Francisco Unified. School District have been

segregated. Through the efforts of school district personnel, Wefts in our

infant/toddler program and our project staff, two new preschool programsP.

were eitablished for "graduates" of our intervention program. The new programs

provide opportunities for integrated activities with nonhandicapped children

forat least half of their school experiences.

A total of 41 children were enrolled in the program from1979-.1982 with

approximately 20 children in the program in a given year. Table 3 lists tné

disabilityband ethnic groupings of children served throughout the)three year

period. Ai these data indicate, the sample of families seryed by the infant/

toddler program reflects the diverse, multicultural population of San Francisco.

6

Page 9: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

re.

P

Follow-up interviews have been conducted with the families of all chilcAn

who have graduated from the program. Of fourteenAraduates, four were placed s

in programs in the Bay Area-for the'severely handicapped, one in a program for

the orthopedically handicapped, seven in noncategorical programs for preschool

children with special needs, and'twoi ire enrolled in regular preschool programs.

All children have contact with nonhandicapped children for some portion of

their school day. The staff of the San Francisco Infant Program have worked

with parents and San Francisco Unified School District personnel to achieve

placemelts in the least restrictive environments for these children, environ-,

If ments that uovide the same academic training and integrated opportunities

children experienced in our toddler program. As/was previous)y discussed,

these efforts have resulted in impuved relations with the school distritt

for infant programs in tne city.and a great expansion in the program options

available to preschool aged children with special needs.

Of the other children at one time enrolled in the prOgrain, eighteen are

continuing because they have not y.g.4 reached age three; two are deceased, and

six*mdved to other cities. Additionally, during Years 2 & 3,seventeen and

eleven childrenrespectively were referred to other agencies by'this program

beLuse the number of staff could not accommodate a larger number of children

and/or because another placement was more appropriate for the specific child

and amily.

Referral arrangementsestablished by the Project DireCtor (Dr. Hanson)

during Year 1 (Activity 5, Objective 1) Were continued throughout the three'

year period. A total of 79 children were referred during this time with

referrals ?ming from a variety of agencies including: University of California

Medical Center, Mt. Zion Ospital, San Francisco General Hospital; St. Luke's

'Hospital, Golden Gate Fgiona1 Center, the local DeveloPmental Disabiliqest

Page 10: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

r

,

,

. ,

Council, Department of'Social Services, California Childrens' Services,

other infant programs in the city, Down's Syndrome League, public health

.'nurses, and local pediatricians.* A program flyer was printed to-iacilitate

ttie referral process. Given the need in t'hiscity forgervices to youfig..

isabled children, especially those from multicultural and disadvantaged

homes, refereals wer'e continuous durivethe three year period..

A review of available infant curricUla was conducted and components of

euh selected for use in tits program (Activity 10, 06jective 1). These

curricula included-the Portage Project; the ,Oregon Project for VisuallyI

Impaired and Blind Preschool Childr'en, Hanson's Teaching Your Down's Syndrome

Infant:-A Guide for Parents, Finnie's Handling the YoUng Cerebral Palsied

Child at Home, the University.of Oregon Cecter of Human Development Preschool

Curriculum Guide, Hawaii Early Learning profile (HELP) Guide, and the HI Comp

Project Curriculum. Additional eaily intervention curricula were collected

and were available as.references for staff for use in the dev lopment of

each child's individual education plan. From these'resources staff membeA

,

compiled a comprehensive curriculum for the infant and toddler programs by

identifying, modifying, and supplementing relevant/approaches, activities and

strategies from these existing curricula. Samples from this curriculum are

included in Appendix A. Appendix B provides a list of curricular objectives\

1

and Appendix C presents a copy of the Individualized Education Program form.

4

I

g

4,

Page 11: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

PARENT/FAMILY PARTICIPATION.

Objective 2 (see Table 1, Objective 2.1-2.3) was begun during Year 1 and

continued in Years 2 and 3. Since parents were viewed as active participants

in the educational process, they functioned both as planners and teachers of

their children. Relevant literature was reviewed (Activity 1, Objective 2)

and a system for formulating infant educational plans in conjunction With

the.child's parents was devised along with progriff sheets and data collection

forms (See Appendix D). Parents received assistance in aesi4ning and imple-

4)

-menting training programs for their children 1-2 times pel- week (Activities

2 and 3, Objective 2). Additionally, parent support groups were formed and-

met biweekly for discussion and counseling (Activity 4, Objective 2'). One

. parent groulikalso requested formal presentation on child behavior management

and child development during this group time. Therefore, these topics were

covered in addition to regular discussions of problems and issues in the care

of a handicapped child. A second type of parent group was established as well.

This group met peniodically in evening or afternoon workshop sessions with

invited speakers. Topics covered included:

1) Public Law 94-142 and parent and child education rights

2) The IEP process and how to work with the school district

3) Speech and language development and facilitation strategies

. Pediatric care and Common questions

. 5) Seizure disorders

6) Controversial therapies

7) Supplementary seniices in the Bay Area

8) Construction of toys,and infant materials

Page 12: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

3

These groups provided an informal setting in which pardas could be'come

better acquainted with one another and also acquire new information.

Families participating in the infant/toddler program represented diverse, w-

multicultural backgrounds as well as various family constellations. Thus,o.j

parent groups were planned to serve single mothers, single fathers, two parent

families, extended families and foster families, most of whom dyfer culturally\

from one another. Through multilanguage and multicultural staff members and

.tremendous flexibility,we accomplished the task-o't meqingt the needs of this

diverse group. Attendance at parent meetings and feedback from parent's. inli-

cated parent satisfaction with ihi's,program component. ,

10

Page 13: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

11

ASSESSMENT OF CHILD PROGRESS. AND.PROGRAM OUTCOMES

Child Behavior Change -

Evaluation of Program-outcpMes included multiple methods (Activity 11,

ObjeCtive 1). Child progress waslineured by use of two standardized insiru-,

ments-, The Bayley Scales of Infant Development (Bayley, 1969) and the UPAS

(dnifOrm PerformanceAssessment System) (White, Edgar & Haring, 1978). Both

were administered at the beginning and end of the school year. Additionally,

continuous measurement of child acquisition of target goals was made on a

criterion-.referenced,instrument, a checklist of objectives,tied specifically

to the prograM curriculum items. Child change data for Years 2 and 3 are. .

presented in Table 4 (Bayley data),.Table 5 (UPAS data) and Table 6 (Curriculum,

Objectives Checklist data). All analyses employed a comparison where each

subject was measured twice.. Pretest (September-October testing) and postest

(May-June testing), comparisons were made 4tilizing a t-test for correlatdd

means. pre-postest analyses yielded significant differences for-all measure.

Thus, these findings suggest that children participating in this early inter-

.%tendon program did change"over the course of their program involvement.

These findings are remarkable in light of the fact thattchildren were

compared as a goup and not divided and compared by categories of severity

levels. Thus, feverely, multiply handicapped children were included in these.

:analyses. Given expectations that these children would progress in smaller

increments of change, remain Aable, or regress as measured by standardized

behavioral assessments, it follows that these scores would affect the group

-scores as a whole. Nevertheless, significant change were noted for all

pretest-postest comparisons.

Single subject research designs (principally multiple baseline designs)

Page 14: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

12

also have been utilized to establish the relationship between infant skill

training efforts (performed by parents) and infant behavior change (Outcome4

6, Objective 1 and Outcome 2, Objective 2). Six'multiple baseline destgns

are presented in Figures 1-6.. These designs show that child change was

integrally linked to experimental educational procedures. Baseline behavior

across all target skills,indicated low behavior rates: Acquisition of these

skills occurred only when'training procedures were implemented (as indicated

by the dotted lines). Numerals denote phases/steps in the training plan

(derived from a task analysis of kach target skill ). Behavior gains mere

4

maintained as ihown by follow-up data points.

Parent Behavior Change

Data on parenting behavior (Outcome 2, Objective 3) atilizing the P'arent

Behavior Progression Scale (PBP) (Bromwich, 1981) were col3ected at the beginning,

(pretest) and encl. (postest) of the school year (see Table 7). Analysis of these

data using a t-test for correlated means yiplded statistically significant pre-

post test differences. Thus, participation in the early intervention program

did appear to positively affect parent behavior as increases in scores on the

PBP represent more adaptive parenting skills, skills.geared more closely to the

children's developmental levels and needs.

Program evaluation procedure also included the gathering of demographic and

descriptive data on chidren and families served and amount and degree of their

participation. Further, a parent "consumer" survey form was developed as a

measure of program outcome; thii form is an adaptation of the Parent Reaction

questionnaire development by Project KIDS, Dallas, Texas. Tables 8 and 9 present

for Years 2 and 3 respectively the number and percentage of parents responding

to each survey item. Results clearly showe satisfaction with the program by

participating families.

Page 15: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

INSERVICE TRAINING FOR PROJECT STAFF

Inservice training for project staff (Activity 9, Objective 1) was .

conducted'both ini..-umlly on an ongoing basis and through formal sessions

by the Project directoi., staff members, and consultants. The training.

sessions were-held .on a biweekly basis. (Staff met as a group weekly also

to discuss program issyes.) Training topics Included: writing- behayioral;4.'

objectives, curriculum development, teaching concepts, asiessment of child

progress, facilitating and structuring parent partidipatiori: structuring

the classroom environment, record keeping and,data gathering procedures,

interdisciplinary team collaboration, CPR, motor development, positioning

. and handling, and single subject research designs. Given that presenters

for the most part were staff members, these,inservice sessions pftvided a',

formal method for traininig transdisciplinary staff members in each' other's

P.

area. Additionally, WESTAR provided-project consultation for staff training

on evaluaVn issues, language developients and feeding program development,.

%1/4

Finally, staff attended the SFSU course; Atypical Infant Development,taught

by Dr. Hanson and workshops.offered 4n the Bay. Area for infant program

personnel.

1

-

13

Page 16: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

14

TRAINING FOR PERSONNEL FROM OTHER PROGRAMSN,r AGENCIES

. A 'major component of the San Francisco Infant Program was its collaboration '

with the Department of Special Education.at San Francisco State University

(Activities 1-3, Outcomes 1-3, Objective 3). Contacts were made with facultY

and SFSU through informal-discussions and through prventations made by Dr.

Hanson to the Special Education faculty. During Year 2, one Doctoral student

and eight Master's degree students in Special Education, three nursing students,

two physical therapy students and one Master's student in Psychology received.'

training in the infantiprogram. During Year 3, five Doctoral students and 35,

Master's students (primarily ifi'Special Education) and two medical students

trained in the program. Student,teachers trained in the project for a minimum

of one semester and received instruction on curriculum delielopment, educational

planning for indiyidual children, working with parents, and data gatherjng.

Other students received training ranging from one day to 20 hours/week depending

upon their courseWork assignments and project schedule.

During Year 3, the San Francisco Infant Program was selected as ne of

ten training sites in the state of California bS, the State Department of

Education, Special Education Resource Network (SERN). The purpose of the

Infant/Preschool SERN is to provide inservice training in early childhood

special education to programs (both public and private) serving infants and

preschoolers with exceptional needs and their families throughout California.

Our peogram was chosen aS an inservice site and provided trainirig to early

educators throughout the year. Training time varied depending on type of

assistance requested by the trainees.

The San Francisco Infant Program in conjunction with the Department of

Special Education at SFSU also sponsored a conference entitled "Visual and

Page 17: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

15,

Auditory Assessments for Preschool Aged Children". This cohferenCe was held

'at San Franciscq,State University in 1981 and was attended by more than 80

Oersons in the field coming from throughout the Bay Area. This topic was%

determined to be of Agreat interest by participants in the West Bay Infant

Consortium. As active participants and former chairs of the Consortium,

..

the staff members of the San Frari6isco Infant Program volunteered their time 0

to provide the conference in response to this.Consortium Needs Assessment.

Page 18: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

16

RESEARCH

Research activities (Objective 4) related to curriculum validation and

structuring of responsive environments for infants was begun during Year 2.

One Master's thesis.(Study 1) comparing traditional therapy techniques and

the use of adaptive Oevices to train motor responses.to severely handicapped

4

infants was tompleted. That thesis is included in Appendix E. ,

Three related investigations also were conducted. In Study 2, a moderately

handiCapped child (3 year old with Down syndrome) wai taught three new skills ,

with the use of electronic equipment. Three training situations were constructed:

an electronic puzzle 'toy, an electronic doll, ag a matching task. The elec-,

tr:onic toys are descrObed in detail-in Appendix F and plans are proVided.

multiple baseline desigh'was utilized'to establish relationships between behavior

change and the treatment program: Trleatment 1 consisted of prompting the child

to fit a puzzle piece into an electrOnic puizlg which lit up.when two'consecutive,

noninterlocking puzzlg pieces were placed. Treatment 2 invotved the use of

shaping techniques in a standard teaching situation p teach the child to match

a common object with pictures of the same class.of Objects (e.g. match 'Moe to

pi.cture of a shoe). Treatment 3 incorporated a plastic stand-up doll equipped

such thatUen the child was asked to find a body part (e.g. "find eyes") and

'respond correctly, the teacher would activate the doll to light up. Figure 7

<*presents the results from this study. As can be seen, training was integrally'

linked to child mastery of the tasks.

In Study 3, a severely, multiply handicapped infant (age I year) diagnosed

as deaf, blind and functioning at the brainstem level was taught an operant-

kick response. This child had previously demonstrated no voluntary purposeful

movements. Data from this study, 'utilizing an ABAB design are presented in

Page 19: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

17

Figure 8. The child was placed on a vibrating mattress pad connected to a

plexiglas kick panel. During baseline (BI) the child had free leg access

to.the panel, but a kick was not consequated in any way. In the treatment

phase (TI) a;kick was consequated by 3-5 seconds of mattress vibration.

Few kicks were made durflT T1. The mother indicated that the bulky diapers

'may have disrupted kicking responses. Therefore, the child's diapers were

removed for all subsequent sessions. Baseline conditions were re-instituted

(days 22-24) and followed by a second treatment phase and again by baseline.

Data from.these latter baseline-treatment-baseline condi6ons (Figure 8)

'establish a link between treatment utilizing the kick panel feedback system

and the,child's kick responses. Further,replications are being conducted

with this child using the kick panel and other types er feedback stimuli.

Study 4 is currently underway. It incorporates a pressure 'Sensitive

panel switch for use by a young severe handicdpped infant to sighal the

parents (e.g. bring the parents to her). Upon pushing the panelyithia

very light touch, this severely, physically disabled year old child is-

learning to call 'her mother to her. No other signal.ling ressonses (e.g.

vocalizing, gesturing) are available to her due to the severity of her

disability.

Upon completion of all studies a paper witl be submitted for publication

in JASH (Journal of the Association for the Severely Hahdicapped). A second

paper describing the equipment utilized it being prepared for submission to

A

journal,Teachinq Exceptional Children.

Page 20: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

DEMONSTRATION AND DI SEMINATION ACTIVITIES

18

. -

Agencies a d university training programs were informed on a continuir6

basis of the 'demoristration responsibilities and capabilities of the San

Francisco Infant Program (ACtivity 1, Objective g). Agencies contacted included

infant psograms in San Francisco and around the Bay Area, Golden GatellegionalNI,

Genter, hospitals and medical facilities,and the,State Departmeq of Education

as well as the San Francisco Unified Schbol District. Additionally,.Dr. Hanson.

was in adjunct member of 6e Slate'Task FOrce'to developeaching credential

for early intervention R:rsonnel. Members of this task force were selected

from major early childhood teacher.trajning programs, universities interested,

in starting early education training programs,, and infant programs.throughout

the state. This group repreented a'pnt%t pool'for deftristktion/dissemination

'Activities. Staff members also were activ ly involved in the West Bay Infant

Program'Consortium, a group of all West Bay Area infant pibg'ram personnel. One

purpose of this group(is to exchange information acro'ss programs, making it an

idei targstjor demonstration/dissemination activities. ,Dr. Hanson was

Chairperson ofthis _consortium.

During Year 2, Dr. Hanson gave five formal and five informal presentations Ae

to education and 'medical agency personnel in San Francisco. Abditionally, a

number of visitors were given an introduction to the early interVent'ion serviCes

*

offered by this project. ViSitors included 34 graduate students in Special

Education, two professors, five teachSrs, six education specialists, and four

medical and nursilstudents (Activity 3, Outcome 2, Objective 5).. In the

second year of project operation 595 persons were instructed on program

components and early intervention services.

- During Yeir 3, staff members mate eight formal and twelve informal

r-

Page 21: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

19

presentations and 61 visitors attended the program ( 4 teachers, 3 eduCational

administrators, 3 physical therapists, 3 occupational therapists, 2 speech

therapists', 4 social workers, 4o Doctoral and Masters level students in

education and psychology, and two medical residents). In the third year the. "

project components were presented to 786 persons.

. During Yelc': 2 and 3 ihe program has functioned as a training site for

student teachers in special educatIon (severely handicapped and early childhood +4-

emphases). The student training manual utilized with these-students isa

. appended in Appendix G.

Staff members are active also in the California Consortium of First Chance

projects, egroup committed to the enhancement of services for young handicapped

children in the state of California and advocacy for ,early intervention services.

Dr. Hanson is serving currently ai president of this organization.

Additionally, the San Franciscb Infant Program was selected as one of ten

training sites in the state of California by the Special Education Resource

Network (SERN). Trajning was provided during Year 3 for infant program

.personnel in the state (ActivitY 2, Outcome 1, Objectjye 5).,

Finally, a written description of the program with particular emphasis on,

dix

parent education and the design and implementation of services for 'a culturallyt

4 diverse populatidn wat completed (Outcome 4, Objective 1 and Outcome 1, Objec-t,.

tive 2). This report appeared as a paper in Topics in Early Childhood

Education (Hanson, 1981)(see Appendix H).

4

401

:e

Page 22: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

COORDINATION WITH OTHER AGENCIES.

20

'The 'Project Director,'Dr. Hanson, met with each of the major infant

.programs in San Francisco (Children's Hospital Child Development Center,

Variety Club Blind Babies Foundation, Easter Sear,,and Family Developmental

Center), California Children's Services, Department of 'Social'Services, the

lodal Developmental Disabilities. Council, and the Golden Gate kegional Center

to formulate plans for child referrals and exchange of services when appropri-.

ate. The'Regional Center's funciion ii to provide a compTete assessment of

disabled children (including medical, psychol gical, social work, speech) ahd

refer children to appropriate services. As ch, it was necessary for this

program to establOsh close, workable ties with this agency. Coordination with

*the school district was inherent in the designed project in that the effort

represented. a collaborative arrangement with the San.Francisco Unffied School

District (Activities 2-4, Objectivej). Project participation in the West

Bay Infant Program 'Consortium also qdilitaied interagency cooperation.

2 2

Page 23: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I. 21

RkPLICATION

/ A pilot replication program was begun duHrig Year.2.with the DeVoss Infant

Program in San Jose (Outcome 1, Objective 5)., These replication activipik

were expanded during Year 3. Data on the progress of children_in the repl.i-

cation program as mtasured on the UPAS and the Project Curriculum Checklist

are presented in Tables 10 and 11 respectively for Year 2 and in Tables 12 and

13 respectively for Year 3. Members of the DeVoss.staff received inservice

training at the San Francisco Infant frogram and monthly consultation from. ,

program staff. These replication activities assisted the San Jose program .

-

particularly in the areas of curriculum development and planning and implementing

a parent involvement program. Prior to reppcation tctivities, thesSan Jose

program had no formal parent involyement. Thin, this replication effort Was

successful in expanding,services to multiply handicapped infants and their

families.

234

Page 24: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CONTINUATION

As of July 1, 1982, the San Francisco I1nfant Program was approved to

rqbeive funding from the State Department of Developmental Services to

provide child treatment services. Theorogram as such is vendorized through

Jib

the Regional Center system to serve developmentally delayed clients. This4

funding allows for the continuation of the program at the'same level ai that

provided by this federal demonstration grant.

fr

F4

4

.11

22

't111 "

I

Page 25: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

23

REFERENCES

Bayley, N. The Bayley scales of infant development. New.York: The

Psychological Corporation, 1969.

Bromwich, R. Workins with sarents and infants: An interactional

approach. Ba timore: University Par Prgss'1981.

Hanson, M.J. A model for e4xly intervention with culturally diversesingle arid multiparent families. To ics in Earl Childhood

Special ucation; 1981, 1(3), 37-44.

White, 0., Edgar, E., and Haring, H. Uniform Performance Assessment

k_§.n. College of Education, Experimental Education Unit, ChildDeVacipment and Mental Retardation Center, University of Washington,

Seattle, Washington, 1978.

a.

0.

Page 26: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

II

I

.1

I

4

TABLE 1

ta,

4

.,

\

2

o

lb

:

0

r

J

P

Page 27: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

OBJECTIVES

1. To establish a model demonstration_educational service delivery system tal_atypical infants, age 0-3 in the San

Francisco Unified School District, asa joint responsibility of the SanFrancisco Unified School District andthe SFSU Department of SpecialEducation.

1.1 To establish a classroom and. homebound educational program orhandicapped (or at-risk) infants0-18 months.

1.2 To erAabliSh an atypical infantclassroom in a public school facilityin San Francisco for handicapped (orae-risk) toddlers 18-36 months of

age. (Year 2,Objective).

1.3 To establish a service mbdel

including comprehensive diagnosis,assessment and referral of equalrelevance to caucasian, black andSpanish-speaking populations inSan Francisco.

1.4 To establish a transdiscipli-nary educational service model.

21

rAmt I

ACTIVITIES

1. Recruit and hirestaff.

2. Select-public-school-facility andnegotiate classroom space.

3. Obtain program approval from theS.F. Unified School District Boardof Education.

4. Procure necessary equipment (desks,cbairs, tables) from school districtand instructional materials from othersources.

5. Contact,hospitals, neonatologists;pediatricians, Regional Center, otherinfant programs, and DevelopmentalDisabilities Council for referrals(program flyer printed to provideinformation to these contacts).

6. Offer services to infants frombirth to 18 months.

7. Offer services to toddlers from18-36 mOnthi (Year 2 Activity).

8. Identify Advisory Committeemembers and organize regular meeting

times. Assign and divide responsi-bilities.

9. Establish regular staff inservicetraining.sessions to include exchangeofstraining information among disciplines.

10. Review available infant curricula

* and select appropriate components inorder to serve target population.

11. Evaluate program outcomes by

multiple methods: standardized

instruments and continuousmeasurement.of infant behaviors

and parent teaching skills.

OUTCOMES c

1. EstablishMent of atypical

infant classmith the S.F.Unified School DiStrict.

2. Receipt of child referrals froma variety of sources withtn S.F.

3. Identification of 15 infants(ranging from severely, multiplyhandicapped tb developmentallydelayed) and provision of,servicesby June 31), 1979.

4. Written reports detailingtransdisciplinary educational ,

model operations (includinginservice training).

5. Written reports documentingchild progress.

6. At least 20% of child programsto include experimental designswhich evaluate causal relationshipsbetween intervention procedures andbehavior ;change.

26 (it

Page 28: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1

..TABLE i

0 .

,1

OBJECTIVES , ACTIVITIES OUTCOMES.......,

12. Establish record keeping system'(ensuring confidentiality) and

. managemeni procedures (division of. responsibilities among.staff).

.

I

4

k

I

,

..

,

,

-,*

,

,

,.

,

4'm

*

Page 29: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

OBJECTIVES

*1ABLE 1.

ACTIVITIESOUTCOMES

2.. To establish a parent instruction, 1.. Review literature relevant to 1. Brief written reports

counseling and.referral system as a the development of objectives, detailing procedures.

component of the educational service.

systeni.2. istablish a parent program of 2. At least 20% of training

-,

continuous infant skill training programs performed to include

: ..

=-2.1_ To offer parents information on their Lincludes_curriCulum and measurement experimental designs,which

rights and on infant services and resouives . SI/Ste-tilt).---------evaluate-ca9salL-relationship.s

on an indjvidual and group basis in their nativebetveen intervention propedures

- language.3. Conduct reguiar training sessions and behavior Change.

,

with parents. .

2.2 To off& parents a compreheniive referral3. Descriptive data on

. service for specialtzed needs relating to 4. Yrovide a parent support group parenting behaviorand home

: Infant care..

(group meeting at least monthly) factors and behavior.change

7...

a. Parent instruction on . as it is related to interventiori=

"2.3 To offer parents instruction on infant specific topics and counseling program. ,...

training activities apd measurement .

of prpgress with their atypical infants.b. Advocacy and information

on client rtghts and services

available.

c, Ongoing referral service

for specialized needs.

Page 30: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.

OBJECTIVES

3..'To establish a program in Conjunctionwith SFSU to assist in the preparation oftransdisciplinary personnel for handi-

capped infant.program§ in California.

3.1 To assist in the development of a'trainingmodel to iflclude'nursing, special educationspeech, and developmental therapies and

pedtatric Medicine.c,

3:2 To assist in the provision of apracticum training experience as a.component of the SFSU training model.

TABLE 1

. ACTIVITIES

1. Offer training in atypical

infant development through the

Department.of Special Education at

SFSU.

2. ,Contact faculty memberg in other

related disciplines and establiSh

ties to coordinate course offeringsto students.

a. Provide practicum setting forgraduate students.from specialeducation and related disciplines.

OUTCOMES

1. Surse entitled "AtypicalInfan Development" taught by

+fans n.at SFSU. .

2. Provide students vdth course-

offerings in.other departments

to include nursing, Communicatiodisorders, ghysical deVelopment,

as well as tpecial edUcation..

3. Students (special educationmaster's and doctoral level) and'

graduate students from.igelateddisciplines participate in the

S.F. rnfant Program to hceivetraining.

1

3.4 1:1

Page 31: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. , .

OBJECTIVES

4. To establish alOogram in.conjunction withSFSU and U.C.. Berkeley to assist in theprovision of a research Facility for thevalidation pf assessment and curriculumprograms for handicapped infants.

.

4.1 To assist the SFSU Department ofSpecial Educat,ion in.transdisciOinaryresearch effets aimed at curriculum validationactivities by providing alaboratory forthe controlled ttgdy of infant assessmentand training.

oTA BLE 1

o

ACTIVITIES OUTCOMES

v

\

1. Design of retearch projects 1. Written r s and .

related to assessment and curriculum, professiona art cles.validation.

2. Design of research projects

related to structuring of responsive

infant envircihment particularly

the construction of adaptiveequipment.

,

,

2. Presentations atprofessional conferences.

.,

t

3. Dissemination of findings

to professionals and parent(where appropriate) community.

,.

,

Page 32: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

OBJECTIVES

5. Demonstration .;nd dissemination oftrajning model to i'nfant program personnel,.eAcation graduate students, medical .

personnel and other interested professionalsand laypersons.

TABLE.1

ACTIVITIES

1. Contact mental health algencies,

school Ostems, state agencies, .

universities, and other infantprogNms to recruit personnel andprogram staff interested in

receiving training in this model,

.2. Design on inservice tra.ining

program for persons who work

directly with handicapped ityntsand their families..

3. be ion systematic'visitorobserv tion system,

a

OUTCOMES-

1, Provide indepth.tr'aining

pro9ram to persons who upon

completion could replicate theprogram or components thereof.

2. ,Provide observation opportunitieS

for persons to learn about early

intervention programs,

36'

I

Page 33: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

31

Page 34: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Activity

Table 2

NUMERICAL SUMMARY OF ACCOMPLISHMENTS

Year 1,

(1979-80)

Year 2 Year.-3

(1980-81) (1981-82)Total

Services to Children

Infants/Toddleri Screened

Infants/Toddlers Served

Services to Families

Family Members Served

Number of Sessions

Staff Development

Hours of Staff Training/Inservice

.Student Placements/VolunteersReceiving Training

Hours of Student/VolunteerTraining

Training for Personnel fromdirer Agencies

Personnel fr9m Other Agencies

Demonstration & Dissemination

Activities

Formal Presentations

Informal Presentations

Visitors to the Program

Persons Receiving Instruc'tion

on Program,Components

Repl icati on

Children Served atReplication Site

31

19

40

962

101

8

372

6

7

49

120

24

18

29

1724

262

15

1788

5

5

51

595

8

24

28

2774

84

42

1612

19

'8

12

61

786

8

79

41

125

5460

447

65

3772

31

19

24

161

1501

16

Page 35: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. 33

c.

r

TABLE 3

o

Page 36: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

34

Table 3

ChildrenDemographic Data

1980 - 1982

1

Child Date of Entry Years in Program DisabilityWeas of Delay Ethnic Group

1 1/23/80 1,2,3 Down's Syndrome WhiteCongenitall Heart Disease .

Cardfac Surgery

2 1/23/80 1 Down's Syndrome. : .White

Heart Defect

3 1/31/80 1 -Down's Syndrome . _WhiteCardiac Surgery I

4 2/6/80 1,2,3 Severe Developmental Delay HispanicMicrocephalyHypotonia

HypercalcemiaVisually,Impaired

2/6/80 1,2,3 Motor Delay Hi.spanic/White

Hearing ImpairedVisually Impaired

Gastrointestinal ProblemsPossible Child Abuse

6 2/6/80 1 Cerebral Palsy

7 2/13/80 1,2,3 Developmental DelaySeizure Prone

Visually ImpairedHearing Impaired

Stereotypic*Behavior

8

9

10

11

2/19/80

2/21/80

2/27/80

3/1/80

1

White

Hispanic

Cerebral Palsy Black

Speech and Language Delay

1,2,3 Premature White

Cerebral PalsySeizures at BirthVisually ImpairedHearing Impaired

1 'Developmental Delay Hispanic

Speech and Language Delay

1 Down's Syndrome White

Cardiac Surgery

42

Page 37: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,..

Table 3

.. 35

Chld Date of Entry Years in Program Disability/Areas of Delay Ethnic'Group'

A12 3/25/80 Scoliosis White

Surgery - Gastrostomy tubeMissing Limbs

N Visually Impaired

13 4/7/80 1,2,3 TwinMicrocephalic-

SpasticityHealqng Impaired (Oestionable)

- , Visually Imprired

..,-

14 5/7/80 1,2,3 Down's Syndrome, White

15 5/21/80 Developmental Delay White

Chronic Ear InfectionDislocated'HipAbnormal Affect

Eye Surgery (congenital esotrophia)

16 5/22/80 Spastic Diplegia Black

Motor Delays.Speech Delays

Probalbe Static Encephalopathy

- 17 6/10/80 1,2,3 Down's Syndrome White

Cardiac Surgery

18 6/15/80 , Spastic Quadriparesis Hispanic

HerpesProfound Mental and

Developmental RetardationMicrocephaly .-

Obesity'Seizures

Visually ImpairedHearing Impaired

19 6/19/80 Chronic Encephalopathy Black/White

Motor Delays-SeizuresStrabismus

4,01.

20 9/4/80 1,2,3 Ccrebral Palsy Black -

Probable NeurofibromatosisSpastic Diplegia

Visua.11y Impaired -(questionable)

21 9/3/80 Down!s Syndrome,

Hispanic

,

...

White,(European and

South Ameritanparents)

,

Page 38: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

r

Table 3

,t

,,

36

Child Date of Entry lears in Program Disability/Areas of Delay Ethnic Group

11/12/80 1,2,3 Premature' 22 White

,Cerebral Palsy .-

23 _5/13/81 2,3 Developmental Delay White,

Cortical BlindnessHypotonia

24 6/8/81 2,3 Congenital Arrested Hydrocephalus Samoan

Developmental DelayCongenital Bilateral Esotropia

25 6/16/81 2,3 Growth and Developmental Delay Hispanic

Questionable Ncrocephaly ,

Seizure Disorder

tr-

26 -6/24/81 2,3 Meconium Aspiration . White

Perinatal AsphyxiaGastrostbmy Tube %Seizure Disorder

)

27 9/11/81 2,3 Chronic Encephalopathy Korein

Seizure DisorderDevelopmental Delays

9/11/81 2,3 Severe Mental Retardation Black

Speech and Language DelaysMotor Delays

29 10/28/81 3 , Down's Syndrome Black/White

30 11/10/81 3 Sickle Cell Anemia Black

Pneumococcal Meningitis. Neurological Sequellae

31 12/11/81

32 1/27/82

33 2/10/82

34 2/10/82

35 3/11/82

36. 3/18/82

3 Down's Syndrome White

Congenital Heart Disease

3 Severe Developmental Delay Hispanic

Hearing Impaired (questionable)

3 Down's Syndrome Black

3 SIDS Black/Puerto Rican

Myaclonic Seizure

3 Down's Syndrome White

Congenital Heart Disease

3 Developmental Delay White

Severe HypotoniaFebrile Seizures

Page 39: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 30 7

Child Date of Ent61 Years in Program Disability/Areas-of Delay Ethnic Group

37 5/6/82 3 Moderate Global White

Developmental DelaySpastic Diplegia

38

"39

40

5/13/82'.

5/13/82

6/7/82

v

3 Down's Syndrome. White

3 Hydrocephalus Black

3 Microcephaly SHispanic,

Polybyoclonia .

"Sunset" Eyes with OpsoclOnusSeverely Delayed Development

41 7/1/82 3 Spastic Diplegia Black

Page 40: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

..

1

,

/1

TABLE 4

st.

\.

as

Page 41: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'Table.4

Bayley Scales of Infant Development

Year 2

MENTAL SCALE

, Mean S.D. t value

.39

SignificanceLevel

Developmentd1,

Pre

15

.

,

90.7,

59.2

.

.

.

-5.82 p.

.

.0001

Post 131.0 74.7,

. 'Raw Score

,

Pre

15

.

, 72.2

.

37.8. ,

-4.59 p .0001

Post 95.2 42.6

PSYCHOMOTOR SCALE

!lean t valueSignificance

Level

DevelopmentalAge

.

Pre

15

i

83.7 52.1

-379 .002

Post 113.3 67.2.

\

Raw Score

.

Pre 33.5 14.3'

,

-4..71

.

.0001

Postir

14.

40.8i04

14.7

4"1

Page 42: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

, .

.

. .

.

.

. ,

. Bayley.

. . .

.

. .

.

Table 4 (continued)

4

S.p.

.

.

t value

40

t

.

:.

SignificanceLevel

.

....

Scales of In'fant Development. .

Year, 3

MENTAL SCALE

N Mean

DevelopmentalAge

Pre

18,..

104..5

-3.81.

p .001

Post 143.7 103.9

Raw ScorePr;e

18

'.

80.7 45;9-4.74 p .0001

Post . 97.,7/ 48.8

.

1 .,

.

,,--

0:..

.

PSYCHOMOTOR SCALE

.

.

S.D.

.

t value

.

SignificanceLevel

..

N Mean

DevelopmentalAge

Pre

18

89.4..

59.10

p .001

Post.

.125.3 82.9

-4.17

Raw Score

Pre

-..

32.7 18.2

-4.72 p .0001

Post18

39.8 19.2.

I

, .. ,

. to

1. .

.

.)

.. . 4 8

......a......M....s.arare...............L.....

.

.

. .

Page 43: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

TABLE 5

'

7

IL>

4.

41

t:4

o

Page 44: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.

.

'.

.

Uniform Performance

N

Table 5

.

42

System (UPAS)

.

.

nificanceS.D. t value

SigLevel

AsS.essment

Year 2

.

Mean

Number of Items

1

Pre,

16

42.6 28.5

-9.12

.

p .0001 .

...

PasSed (Total)

Post 64.2 35.9

Percentade of'Items.Passed(Total)

Pre 14.7 9.9-9.32 p .0001

-.Post 22.3 12.5

7-

.k.----

1

,

...,

.

N

.

Year 3.

.

.

SignificanceS.D. t value

LevelMean

Number of ItemsPassed (Total).

°Pre

18

46.2 31.3

-6.65 p .0001

Post 73.2 42.8

,

Percentage ofItems' Passed

P re

18

16.0 10.8

-6.62

,

,

p .0001

(Total)Post

.

25.5 14.9.

..

,

.

.

,

..-y. \.4.

.

.

.

.

Is

.

..

..

.

,

k? U .i

Page 45: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

43

TABLE 6

5

Page 46: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 6

CurricUlum Objectives Checklist:

Year 2 .

Mean S.D. t value

`1

*

SlgniflcanceLevel

Number of ItemsPassed (Total

Pre

16

69.1, 141.6'

,

...

,-R..95

.

Post 107.1 52.3

Percenta, g of

'Items.Passed(Total)

Pre,

16

29.0. 17.6

-9.27

.

.0001.,

,

Post 44.8 21.9

Year 3

:Mean S.D. t valueSignificance

Leyel

.

Number of ItemsPassed (Total).

Pre

18

91.5 55:3

-5.09 .0001

.

Post 136.0 78.2

Percentage ofItems Passed(fotal)

Pre A

18

32.5 17.7,

-5137

-.

p

0t

.0001

,Post 48.2

.

24.5

,

5)

Page 47: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.?

*.

.00

TABLE 7

53

, 45 '

Cs.

Page 48: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 7

Parent Behavior Progression Scale

Year 2

Mean . .S.D. tvaluè

Total Raw= Score"

Pre

Post

16

47.7 12.2

54.3

Year 3

10.2

-3.90

4

46

SignificAnce.'Level

. ,

p

Mean S.D. t value_Significance

. Level4410.1

Total RawScore

Pre

Post

17

54.1

58.8 . 12.0

5 1

-3.05 p .Q08

.... I

Page 49: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'41

TABLE 8

47

=

Page 50: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

Table 8Year 2

PARENT REACTION QUESTIONNAIRE

(Adapted from Project KIDS.Dallas; Texas)

The San Francisco Infant Program wants to give you 6nd your child thebest possible program. Your answers to these quest.ions will help us to

. strengthen and improve the program.

Please answer each question by placing an "X" in'the space that bestfits how you feel. An example would be:

.

1) Is your child enrolled in theSan Francisco Infant Program?

48

1 YesI think

soI don'tknow

I don'tthink so

( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) (-)

Please feel free to write in any additional comments and cTg'rify anY answersyou need to.

1) Is the Infant Program staffqualified to work with yourchild?

2) Is there good communicationbetween you and the projectstaff?

3) Is the teacher and therpaisthelpful in explaining how.todo the educational program?

4) Do you feel that you are animportant participant in theprogram?

5) Has the program helped you tobetter understand your child'sabilities and needs?

6) Has the Infant Program helpedyou to learn more about working'with your child?

7) Are the educational programswritten to meet the individualneeds of your child?

YesI think

so

I on'tknow

I don'tthink so

,

10/11

(91%)

9/11 2/11

(82%) (18%)

10/11

(91%)

3/11 3/11

(73%) (27%)

11/11

(100%)

11/11

(100%)

9/11 1/11 1/11

(82%) (9%) (9%)

5

Page 51: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 8Year 2

Parent Reaction QuestionnairePage Two

8) Are the toys useful in doingthe educational program'activities?

9) Can you easily understand thedirections for the educationalprogram?

10) Did you feel that the therapistand teacher took too much timedoing your child's evaluation?

'11) Did you get a completeexplanation of your child'sevaluation?

-.. 12) Did you understand what you weretold about the evaluation?

13) Did you agree with theevaluation results?

14) Are you happy with the SanFrancisco Infant Program?

15) Do you feel that charting (data-taking) is important?

16) Are the charting instructionseasy to follow?

17) Do you feel that your childhas made progress in theInfant Program?

18) Do you want to continue inthe program?

19) Would you like to become moreinvolved in the program?

* 1/11 No Answer

(9%)

49

YesI thinkl

so

I don'tknow

I don'tthink No

,

so

1/11

(9%)

3/11

(27%)

7/11

(64%)

6/11 4/11 1/11

(55%) (36%) (9%)

9/11 2/11

(82%) (18%)

7/11 2/11 2/11

(64%) (18%) (18%) ,

10/11 1/11

(91%) (9%)

7/11 3/11 1/11

(64%) (27%) (9%)

7/11 2/11 1/11 1/11

(64%) (18%) (9%) (9%)

11/11

(100%)

10/11 1/11

(91%) (9%),

4/11 2/11 2/11 2/11'

(371) (18%) (18%) (18%)

Page 52: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 8Year 2

Parent Reaction QuestionnairePage Three

20) Has the San Francisco InfantProgram helped other membersof the family understand thechild's needs and abilities?

21)- Do you feel siblings should beincluded in the program in someway? * 1/11 No Answer

(9%)22) Do you feel the integration of

min-disabled children in theprogram has been beneficial?

50

YesI thinkso

I don'tknow

I don'tthink so

No

7/11 3/11 1/11

(64%) (27%) (9%)

5/11 1/11 2/11 2/11

(46%) (9%) (18%) (i8%)

9/11 1/11 1/11,

(82%) (9%) . (9%)

Page 53: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. 51.

1,

,

4

TABLE 9

*

,

e

,

,

,

Page 54: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

go'

Table,9Year 3

PARENT REACTION QUESTIONNAIRE

(Adapted from Project KIDS Dallas, Texas)

The San Francisco Infant Program wants io give you and your child thebest possible program. Your answers to these questions will help us-tostrengthen and,improve-the program.

Please answer each question by 'placing an "X':in the space that bestfits how you feel. An example would be:

.1) Is your child enrolled in theSan Francisco Infant Program?

52

YesI think

so

I don'tknow il

!,44

I don'tthink so

INo

(X) ( ) ( ) (

Please feel free to write in any additional comments and clarify anY answersyou need to.

1) Is the Infant Program staffqualified to work with yourchild?

2) Is there good communicationbetween you and the projectstaff?

( )

YesI think

so

I don'tknow

I don'tthink so

No

17/17100%

17/17

3) Is the teacher and therpaist , 17/17helpful in explaining how to 100%

do the educational program?

4). Do you feel that yo.0 are an 16/17 1/17

important participant in the 94%

program? .

5) Has the program helPed you to 16/17 1/17better understand your child's 94% 61,

abilities and needs?

6) Has the Infant Program helpedyou to learn more about workingwith your child?

17/17100%

7) Are the educational programs 16/17 1/17written to meet the individual 94% 6%needs of your child?

(50

Page 55: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pai-ent Reaction QuestionnairePage.Two

No Answer

Table 9 .

Year 3

8) Are the toys useful in doing.the educational program

/activitis?*1/17

9) Can you easily understand thedirections for the educationalprogram?

10) Did you feel that the therapistand teacher took too much timedoing your child's evaluation?

11) Did you get a completeexplanation of your child'sevaluation? *1/17

6%

12) Did you understand what you were: told about the evaluation?

13) Did you agree with theevaluation results?

14) Are you happy with the SanFrancisco Infant Program?

15) Do you feel that charting (datataking) is important?

16) Are the charting instructionseasy to follow? *1/17 . .

17) Do you feel that your childhas made progress in theInfant Program?

18) Do you want to continue inthe program?

19) Would,you like to become moreinvolved in the program? .

53

Y.er think

soI don'tknow

I don'tthink so .

No

15/1788%

1/176%

16/1794%

1/176%

12/17 1/17 1/17 1/17 2/17

70% 0% 0% 0% 12%

14/17 1/17 t 1/1782%

,...

16/17 1/17

94% 0%

e16/17 1/17

94% 6%

17/17100%

14/17 1/17 2/1782% 0% 12%

13/17 1/17.

1/17'' 1/17

70%

17/1710Q%

16/17 t 1/17

94% 6%

17/171 00%

Page 56: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,

. Parent Reaction QuestionnairePage Three

-.

Table 9'Year 3

tr>....,...

20) Has the San Francisco InfantProgram helped other membersof the family understand thechild's needs and abilities?

21) Do you feel siblings stould beincluded in the program in someway? *2/17

12%

22) Do you feel the integration of

. non-disabled children in theprogram has been beneficial?

*3/17la% ,

r-

1

\ .54

YesI think

soI don'tknow

,

I don'tWnk so `NC)

-

10/17 6/17 111759% . 35% .60

,

10/17 V17 2/17 1/1758% 1ZZ' 12% 6%

12/17 1/17 1/1770%

,

t

. ,.

,

4

,

Page 57: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 10

DeVoss Infant Program (San Jose)

UPAS Data

Pre- (January, 1981) & POstest (July, 1981) Comparisons

-Percentage of Items Passed

56,

,CHILD PRE-ACADEMIC GROSS MOTOR

"

COMMUNICATION SOCJAL/SELF-HELP

.

Pre (1/81)

Post (7/81)

13%

18%

53%

73%

16%

30%

11%,

27%

.

..:

.

...

Pre (1/81)

Post (7/81)

18%

8%

36%

48%

14%

, 29%

22%

33%

.

-,

Pre (1/81)

PoSt (7/81)

.

13%

16% .

34% .

53%

4%

6i

20%

20%

Pre (1/81)

post (7/81)

36%

50%

'59%

70%

46%

60%

44%

64%

Pre (1/81)

Post (7/8))

.

26%

53%

48%

61%.

14%

29%

40%

44%.

.

Pre (1/81)

Post (7/81).

7%

'16%

12%

18%.

13%

25%

7%

22%

Pre (2/81)

Post (7181)

26%

37%

33%

36%

38%

56%

22%

47%

,

8

Pre (2/81)

Postj(7/81)

14%

16%

20%

21%6 3

7%

9%

9%

13%

1

1

J

Page 58: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. .4

. .Table 11

.

.

58

. ,

DeVoss Infant Programi (San Jose) ,

Curriculum Checklist Data

*.Pretest (January, 1981 & Postest (July, 1981) Comparisons

Number & Percentage of Items Passed -

.

.

. . .

,

CHILD COMMUNICATION GROSS MOTOR FINE.MOTOR COGNITION PRE-ACADEMIC

.

, .

. .

..

.

Pre 7/28 (25%) 43/73 (59%) 29/51 (57%) 13/30J43%) 0/46 (0%)

Post 15/28.(54%) 43/73 (59%) 49/51 (96%) 19/30 (63%) 0/46 (OW

Pre 6/28 (21%) . 41/73 (56%) 38/51 (75%) 24/30 (80%) -0/46 (0%)

Post 15/28 (54%)' 49/73 (67%) 41/51 (80%) 24/30 (80%) 1/46'(2%)

-.2/28 (7%) 42/73 (58%) 14/51 (27%) '11/30 (37%) 0/46 (0%)

Post 6/28 (21%) 52/73 (71%) 26/51 (51%) 19/30 (63%) 0/46 (0%)

,

.

,

,

Pre 19/28 (68%) 52/73 (71%) 48/51 (94%) 25/30 (83%) 13/46 (28%)

.Post 24/28 (86%) 55/73 (75%) 49/51 (96%) 30/30 (100%) 34/46 (74%)

-

.

.

.

Pre 8/28 (29%) 43/73 (59%) 43/51 (84%) .25/30 (83%) 0/46.(0%);

Post 11128 (39%) 54/73 (74%) 48/51 (94%) 30/30 (100%) 5/46 (11%)

Pre 6/28 (21%) 10/73 (14%) 17/51 '(33%) ' 7/30 (23%), 0/ 6'(0%)

Post 14/28 (50%) T8/73 (25%) 35/51 (69%) 20/30 (66%) 6 (0%)

,

Pre 20/28 (71%) 26/73 (36%) 44/51 (86%) 21/30 (70%) 3/46 (7%)

Post 24/28 (86%) 39/73 (53%) 49/51 (96%) 30/30 (100%) 13/46 (28%

1

Pre. 0/28 (0%) .

615/73/21%) 37/51 (73%) 14/30 (46%) 0/46 (0%)

7/28 (25;) 22/73 (30%) 39/51 (76%) 15/30 (50%). .0/46 (0%)

_Post H,

Page 59: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 12

DeVOss Infant Program (Sin Jose)

UPAS Data

Pretest (December, 1981) & Postest (June, 1982) Comparisons

Percentage of Items Passed

60

CHILD PRE-ACADEMIC GROSS MOTOR COMMUNICATION SOCIAL/SELF-HELP

1

Pre (1/81)

Post (6/82)

13% 9%

29% 31%

2

Pre (12/81)

Post (6/82)

12%

6% 8%

33% 3'8%

23% 57%

3

Png (12/81)

Post (6/82)

15%

4Pre (12/81)

Post (6/82)

5Pre (12/81)

Post (6/82)

6%

36%

4%

22%

47%

51%

5% 16%

14% 18%

7% 11%

28% 27%

7%.

12%

6

Pre (12/81)

Post.(6/82)

16% .

45%

7

Pre (12/81)

Post (6/82)

5%

14% 28%

16%

32%

4%

9%

4%

20%

59%

64%

35%

55%

24%

62%

10% 21%

39% 63%

8Pre (12/81)

Post (6/82)

11%

37%

4%

36% 52%

29%

61%

11%

38%

10%

46%

Page 60: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Table 1352

DeVoss Infant Program (San jose)

Curriculum Checklist Data

Pretest (December, 1981) & Postest (June,I1982) Comparisons

Number N Percentage of Items Passed

CHILDSOCIAL/

SELF-HELPCOMMUNICATION GROSS MOTOR FINE MOTOR COGNITION

PRE-ACADEMIC

Pre

st

26/60

42/60

(43%)

(70%)

3/30

15/30

(10%)

(50%)

70/ 1 l\j.22/52

80/112

)3

(71M 46/52

(42%)

(88%)

16/30.(53%)

26/30 (87%)

2/45

.3/45

(4%)

(7%)

2

Preu

Ppst

20/60

30/60

.b

(33%),

(50%)

10/30

23/30

(33%)

(77%)

73/112

75/112

(65%)

(67%),

31/52

39/52

(60%)

(75%)

20/30

28/30

(67%)

(93%)

1/45

10/45

(2%)

(22%)

3

Pre

Post ..17/60

14/60 (23%)

(28%)

2/30

3/30

,

(7%)

(10%)

61/112-

71/112

(54%)

(63%)

21/52

25/52

(40%)

(48%)

1/30

1/30

(3%)

(3%)

0/45 (On

1/45 (2%)

4

Pre

Post

20/60'

27/60

(33%)-

(45%)

2/30

8/30

(7%)

(27%)

62/112

73/112

(55%)

(65%)

d

20/52

39/52

(38%)

(75%)

13130

17/30

(43%)

(57%)

0/45

5/45

(0%)

(11%)

5

Pre

Post

18/60

22/60

(30%)

(37%)

2/30

5/30

(7%)

(17%)

76/112

80/112

(68%)

(71%)

22/52

34/52

(42%)

(65%)

5/30

11/30

(17%)

(37%)

1/45

2/45

(2%)

(4%)

6

Pre

Post

39/60

56/60

(65%)

(93%)

20/30

25/30

(67%)

(83%)

68/112

73/112

(61%)

(65%)

38/52

,45/52

(73%)

(87%)

27/30 (96%)

30/30 (lpo%)

6/45

30/45

(13%)

(67%

7

Pre

Post

37/60

54/60

(62%)

(90%)

5/30

17/30

(17%)

(57%)

69/112

74/112

(62%)

(66%)

38/52

49/52

(73%)

(94%)

25/30

28/30

(83%)

(93%)

3/45

29/45

(7%)

(64%

8

Pre

Post

29/60

52/60

(48%)

(81%)

7/30

19/30

,

(23%)

(63%)

66/112

71/112

(59%)

(63%)

6f

37/52

49/52

(71%)

(94%)

19/36

29/30

(63%)

(97%)

3/45-(7%)

28/45 (62%

Page 61: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

..

..

A

FIGURESI - 8

4

67

o

1

1

= 63..

.7t

o

r

z

Page 62: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

La.

0

4.

LIFTING ARIVI8

100

75

25

'I I Ili I I I t. I Cs I

2 4 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48

ROLLING

a+

I I

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48

DAYS

Figu re 1

Page 63: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

10 0

75

5 0

v)wv)Z 25

0a.1/1IiiQk

IVLi/Weg0V 10 0

6

z 75imucetita. 5 0

B-

I

PLACING PEGS

II

ii

r!

t

vIV

110... .... 'or 41.... sow- ..... sip .... a...

V

-

2 5

10 20 3 0

______

40 5 0 60 70 80 90 100 110 120''. -B

CREEPING

-

1

1

1

1 1 I I,..1M____CLIttln_tja_rLaLl=4"". 1.1614tj it. r1-4-t T4171 "el i t_j_Lj_jjL_L_L_Lj_j_j10 20 30 40 50 6 0 70 8 0 90 100 110 12 0

DAYS

Figure 2

Page 64: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

100 1

5 0

TTITTlifibtAI14IIVit26`2'.2i2i4i202b%b134

1 00-

5 0

PLACES PEG IN PEGBOARD

1 00

50

02 4 8 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 48 48 50 68 70.72 4 6 78 80 8 84 86

4 6 8 10 1 14 16 18 20 22 4 26

catelot4V4IAIA'

CREEPS

36 38 4O I44 44 4V4 sO

DRESSES

2

8082 84 86 90 92 94 96 98 100

70 72 476 8089-Leitt"-ka-tetititi

ON. ORM*

DAYS

Fi gure 3

96 98 100

Page 65: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

100

50

10

100

50

iiiiiiiiiiiiiiii

PLACE PL122LE PIECE2

4

2 4 6 5 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

7

26 26 30 32 34 36 3a 40 42 44 46 40 50 52 54 515 58 60 62 64 68 68 70 72 4 76 78

MATCH PICTURESa

82 92 94 98 98

. simINO

2 4 6 10 12 14 15 113 20 22 24 28 28 30 32 34 38 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 ea 80 82 64 84 68 70 72 74 78 78 80 82 84 ea 68 90 92 94 90 ea loo 102 %wove

DAYS

Page 66: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

100

SO

100

50

REACH AVD TOIJCH'

.3

MACE VAND '4"a

LLL,2 4 IS 10 12 14 1 30 32 34 lb 38 40 42 52 7. . :t * " . .*: 'es ir

0=111 OM. WINO ONNIINIM 11 ONE Ow*

DAYS

Figure 5

Page 67: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

PUZZLE

50

V ILII,Liii_LIIIIttitt.1)_ttiLitt....)1...4 101 41141 16 18 20 22 24 26 8 6 58 60 62 64 66 68_ 70 72- 74 76 -78 80 82 84 86 88 90 .

-

L. M.Y.0 MY.* damy, IMma.

4 -?c, 1

WA.LKIN.G

.I

14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28\\4

6 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 7 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90I 1_ ITT II41111...LCI_LifILAI)dIt_LI I) fliki_111_41I

8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

Fi gure 6

ay./ ...mamma eam... dory away/ gamy*

JACKET OFF

B

\51-6-1-81111-6101e164 661 681710 7121714-1716 1718 18101821 B4186188 90

cn

DAYS

Page 68: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

2

PUZZLE

'4

!

131

( 1

14

I

1 1

I I

5 0 6.1

10 22 24

MATCHING,'

4

4

68 70 72 74 76 78 80 82 84 86 88 90 02 94 96 98 100102

awl= oisummuk masanis=owommausemanswormsounirliraummoura14 6 8 10 1 4 16 13 20 22 24 25 3 0 32 30 36 30 40 4 44 8 0 5 6 6 62 64 86 60 70

1

1

2 4 6 0 ,0 12 14,15 111 20 72 24 26 20

DAYS

BODY PARTS

14

72 74 76 73 80 82 84 86 88 90 92 94 96 98 100102

M11 I I I I I IMIIN11111=1111 MX AMR 141=11 1111M

32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 50 60 62 64 66 00 70 72 74 75 70 00 02 84

Figure. 7

I tic, t I _LtuILLt_t_

oo 90 92 94 95 90 100102

Page 69: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

*

-).

15

.

1

B. ..-1

,f

,

/.

.ul

A

B

...

.,

12

e

1

B

'4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38

DAYS

Page 70: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

- 0

,

Appendi x A

Curri cul um Samples .

,

.

.m..m.amommie rIi.......

0

,

1

i

1,

,

*I,

I.

,

0

a

Page 71: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CgoiSkto-t-q__LPRome)3. Roiling Turnmy to Back

Objective:

Hanson, D.S.

p. 78

Materials:

9.

-

roils fromstomach to back

Child will roll from stomach to back withoutassistance within one minute when placed on thefloor with favorite Object out of reach,for 80% ofthe trials on 2 out of .3 consecutive days.

Wheo rollino.child should demonstrate truni:. rotation

by leading With either an arm or ieg and allowing therest of the body to follow in sequence...

Favorite toysPerson's face and/or voiceBlanketLarge wedge

Prerequisite: None

Procedures: 1. Position - Lying on tummy (alternative - sidelying)

Carolina

Area: M-P

17, dp. 241

HELPNo. 3.10p. 75

2. Teaching Procedures:1

I) Entice the child to roll by dangling a toyin front of his face, then moving it to theside and behind his line of sight.

2) Place the child on a blanket and tilt himslightly, making it easier for him, to roll.

3) Place the child on a large wedge and introducethe rolling pattern by turning his head orshoulder and guiding him through the movement.After a few repetitions, place the child backon the floor or blanket and try to secure amore active roll on the part of the child.

Alternative may begin in sidelying:

I) Lay the child on his side periodically to playwith a toy. Remove the toy and show the childhow to return to his back by gently movingback his snoulder or hip. Place a small pillowor towel next to the child's back to help himstay in a side-lyin position.

2) Move a toy or mobile across the child's line ofvision and then over his head. Encourage thechild to follow the toy until he rolls ever.Be sure the child rolls to both sides wheneverdcing this activity.

63

Page 72: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

HELPNo. 3.10p. 75

HELPNo. 3.17p. 77

3) Place the child inside a large carpetedcylinder in side-lying position. Move the

cylinder slightly to start the rollingmovement to supine.

4) Place the child in side-lying oft a towel.Lift one edge of the towel to start therolling movement to supine.

5) Roll by using the shoulder to lead. One

arm should be up over the child's head. Pull

the opposite shoulder back. The child will

assist by moving his head, trunk, and legs .

when 1-,e feels his arm moving. Repeat, using

the other arm and helping the child roll tothe opposite side.

6) Roll by using the leg to lead. Bend one hip

and one knee up; the other is held straight.Gently turn the bent leg to the opposite -

side,of the body. The child's trunk, arms,

and head should follow. Repeat using the

other leg.

8,1-4

10.

Page 73: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps: 1. Child prompted through 3/4 of roll. Flex

hip and knee (be sure bottom arm is outfrom tindvr child) move child pist sidelying.Childliels last 1/4 of roll independentlywhen presented with a favoHte object offto the side.

Hanson, D.S. 2. Child prompted through 1/2 of roll. Move child

p. 79 to sidelying with flexed hip and knee. Child

rolls last 1/2 of roll independently whenpresented with a favorite object off the side.

3. Child prompted through 1/4 of roll. Flex htp

and knee. Child rolis 3/4 of roll independentlywhen presented with a favorite object off to theside.

4. Child rolls from stomach to back With only aslight prompt of nudge to begin roll whenpresented with a favoilte object off to the side.

5. Child independently rolls from stomach toback when presented with a favorite object off

to the sid,-

Criterion:

When your child gets 80% of the trials correct,'on 2 out off3 consecutive days, move on to the next step.

Child will roll from stomach to back without assistancewithin one minute when placed on the floor withfavorite object out of reach for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

11.

Page 74: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

12.

Observati1T Does your baby lead more with.her arm or leg?Can your baby stay in a sidelying position independently?Howlong? What order does your baby's head, arm, chest,hips and legs roll?

4

PrecauVon:Carolina

p. 241

If the child is spastic, it is important to guardagainst mass thrusting movements in the rollingpattern. Make sure the child is relaxed and dothe movements slowly. Allow time for the child torespond and reward him with praise, clapping, etc.if movement iii5eFTF;FITied well.

Do not use this exercise if the child arches hisback, head and legs during the roll.

HELPNo 3.17 Position the child's arm out of the way, eitherp.77 straight up overhead or down by the side, on the side

toward which he is moving.*

*This is to protect the child's shoulder.

Page 75: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Hanson, DSpp. 70-71#6

Objective:

Material:

Prerequisite:

Procedure:

Hanson, DS70-71

#5

HELPNo. 3.51p. 86

r.P., ,

. t

. .

A 'ail WO,.(

,

, 3

AL. ,,,V.J. A .4.

6. SITS, NO SUPPORT

Child will sit independently with no support, headand back straight, for one minute when placed ina sitting position on a firm surface, for 80% ofthe trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Favorite Toys2-hnded musical instrumentsLarge lightweight objects - require 2 hauds; i.e.,

balloon, dollBusy Box

Sits Self-Supported by Arms and Hands

1. Position - Place child in sitting positionsupported by arms and hands on a firm surface.

2. Teaching Procedures:

Using the following procedures to encourage freeingup of the hands ip sitting.

1) Play'ball with the child while she sitsunsupported.

2) Place the child in sittihg. Let the childplay with a Busy Box hung on the wall ather level.

3) Let the child hold large objects which requiretwo hands, e.g., a large ball, balloon or doll.

4) Hold a tby overhead so the child must reachup with her arms.

5) Play pat-a-cake. .

6) Let-the child play twb-handed musicalinstruments,- e.g., a tambourine, triangleor rhythm sticks.

21.

Page 76: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

HELPNo. 3.51p. 86

7) Let the child sit on a small box with herfeet supported on the floor. Do any of

the above ictivities.8) Let the child sit astride a narrow seat

with her feet on the floor andiegsapart. Let her look at books or identifybody parts in a mirror. .

9) Encourage the child to kgpiher back' straight in sitting by u ing one or more

of the following activities:a) Tap and rub the base of the spine.b) Bounce the child gently in the

sitting position.c) Tap the shoulders back.

.,

\

8d

,

,

22.-

,

!

-.

Page 77: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps-

Hanson, DSpp. 70-71#6

Criterion:

1. Child will sit self-supported with hands onknees, legs slightly apart to provide a stable

sitting base.

(a) Child sits as specified for 10 seconds.20 seconds.30 seconds.

40 seconds.

50 ieconds.60 seconds.

2. Child will sit self-,supported with one handon knee,-the other free to reach or play with

objects. (Present a toy to encourage one

hand to be free).(a) Child sits as specified for 10 seconds.

20 seconds.

30 seconds.

40 seconds.50 seconds.60 seconds.

3. Child will sit independently with head andback straight when placed in at sitting .

position. (Hands free.)

(a) Child sits as specified for 10 seconds.20 seconds.30 seconds.40 seconds.50 seconds.60 seconds.

When child does 80% of the trials correctly on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days, move to next step.

Child will sit independently witti no support, head

and back straight, for one minute when placed in

a sitting position on a firm surface for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

23.

Page 78: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Observation:

Precaution:

Does your child startle easily? Does s/he fall

over from sitting when there are loud noises or

sudden movements? Can your child look freely.in

all directions while sitting?

If you child,arches or pushes backwards while

in this position, rock him/her at shoulders side

to side and bring shoulder blades gently dOwn

and forward; (may also need to press down with

a flat hand on the center of their upper chest

to bring head forward). If you have problemscontrolling this, consult your therapist.

4

Page 79: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

13

SEL F -A-LP

5. Scoops food, feeds self with spoon.

Objective: A) When a spoon with food is placed in child's handchild will bring spoon.to his/her mouth, take the foodoff the spoon within 2 minutes of presentation of spoon;for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

B) When spoon is placed'in tray/bowl, child will pick upspoon, scoop food from bowl, and feed him/herself 1 spoon-ful of food within 2 minutes of presentation of spoon,for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Material:

Procedure:

HELPNo. 6.26(3)p. 164

Hanson, D.S.p. 180

Child-sized spoon, anY spoon-foods.

1. Position child in an upright'pnsition so that his/herarms/hands can move freely.

2. Place the spoon in the child's hand or guide his handto the spoon and assist his grasp if he cannot hold ontothe spoon. If ne Shows hand preference, place the spoonin that hand.

3. Help child to pring spoon up to position as stated inobjective.

4. May place spoon.in child's hand and take him/her throughthe steps, requiring him/her to do only what is stated inobjectives, 'e.g., show him/her how to pick up spoon, scoopand bring spoon partway to mouth.

5. If child succeeds at objective, praise ihild, mark (+)

6., If child does not complete objective, assist him/her.Give him/ner only as mucn assistance as is necessary.Mark (-).

7. As you teach feeding, teach a particular step until the

child is doing it independently, then move to the nextstep and teach it tO independence and so on. Never go

back and prompt your child when the child can already

do something independently. For example, prompt the

child to scoop the food as necessary, and then let .111.\,Let the child perform bringing the spoon to the mouth -..

and removing the food independently as you have already

taught her/him to do- On steps you have not yet taught,

completely guide the child through that step,. For

instance, if you have not reached Step 82 y t, merelyguide the child-through it --but do not vide thatguidance for steps you have tra

8. If child gets 80% of the trials correct, on 2 out of3 consecutive days, go on to the next step.

9

Page 80: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps:

14

A. 1. When a spoon is placed in child's hand, child will mainiain

his/her grasp on spoon for at least 30 seconds. (Spoon may

or may/not contain food)

2. When a spoon with f)od is placed in child's hand, and childis assisted in bringing spoon to mo , c d will place

spoon in mouth and take the food off the spo , within 1

minute of presentation of spoon.

3. When a spoon with food is placed in child's hanchild is assisted in bringing spoom to:

a) 1" from child's, mouthb) 6" "

II

0 1 fi. "It

child will bring spoon the rest of the way, place spoonin his/her mouth and take the food off the spoon, within',1 minute of presentation of spoon.

B. 1. When a spoon with food is placed in tray/bowl, child willpick up spoon, scoop food from bowl, and feed him/herself

1 spoonful of food within 2 minutes of presentationof spoon.

2 When spoon is placed on tray/bowl, child will pick up spoon,scoop food from bowl, and feed him/herself 1 sPoonful of'food within 2 minutes of presentation of spoon.

For each of the above steps, use the following prompts, if necessary:a) maximum prompt, i.e., assist child through most

of action.b) moderate prompt, i.e., assist child through

initial part of action.c) mimimum prompt - i.e., tap child,'s hand in

-direction of mouth/spoon.d). no prompt.

Criterion: A) When a spoon with food i placed in child's hand child willbring spoon to his/her mouth, take the food off the spoonwithin 2 minutes of presentation of spoon, for 80% of thetrials, on 2 out .of 3 consecutive days.

B) Whmspoon is placed on tray/bowl, child will pick upspoon, sco,p food from bowl, and feed him/herself 1 spoon-

ful of food within 2 minutes of presentation of spoon,for 80%.of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 81: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Suggestions:

1A. To Teach ChiA to hold spoon:

15

1. Acquaint the child with a spoon. Let him look at at,

- touch it, grEsp it and handle it. Let him do this.as

yop feed him with another spoon, if this does not greatlyinterfere with his feedtng.

2. Place the spoon on the ,table, let him reach and grasp fOrHELP it, allowing him to use whichever.hand he prefers. AtNo. 46.26(1,3-5) first, he may not use the spoon instead, he.may experimentp. 164 with it by banging and waving it.

3. Offer 'a small wooden mixing spoon, a large serving spoon,or measuring spoons"during play.

4. For the older delayed child:a. Offer a spoon with a built-up handle if the child's

grasp is weak and he.has difficult, grasping a regularspoon. . Wrap 'a layer of sponge around the spoon handlewith masking tape to build up the handle or use acommercially made built-up.h

,b. Place an elastic cuff aroundInsert a spoon handle intassist the child who imaintaining grasp.*

dle spoon.the palm of the Vend.e cuff. This will

hysically incapable of

B. To teach child to bring'spo to mouth:

1. Let the child grasp t e spoon with either hand. ..Do notinsist he use the r'.ht or left hand exclusively unless heshows a strong h. preference or he definitely has betteruse of one hand more than the other.

2. Sit next to the child in front or behind him when assistinghim. ,D0 not sta,nd over him.

3. Scoop a favorite food or a food which will stick to thespoon. Encourage the child to bring the spoon to hismouth to lick it.,

4. Assist or guide the child in bringing the spoon to hismouth, if necess4ry.

5. Continue to allow the child to finger feed while he islearning .o holp and use the spoon.

6. Use a spoon which will meet the child's needs:. a. Use a child's spoon. Be sure it is not too large

for the child's mouth or hand.b. Use a spoon with a shallow bowl if the child htis

difficulty removing the food from the spoon wfth hisupper lip.

.c. Use a teflon coated spoon for the child who has astrong bite reflex. Do not use a plastic spoon sinceit may break.

d. Use a child's spoon in which the bowl of the spoonturns toward the child. With this type of spoon thechild need not turn his hand to bring the spoon tohis mouth. Commercially made spoon of this type are

sold at drug stores.

HEL

No. 6.31(2-7)p. 165

Page 82: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

16

C. To teach child to scoop food; feed self with spoon:

1. Let the child experiment and practice self feeding witha'spoon. Do not scold or fuss about spills or messiness.Spread newspapers, an old sheet, or a plasti^. sheet on thefloor to catch spills. Make mealtimes as pleasant aspossible and do not pretsure the child to feed himselfcompletely.

2. Help the child take over before he becomes frustrated inhis efforts to feed himself. Be sure to give the childthe opportunity to do as much as possible by himsl.lf.

3. Allow the child to finger feed when he gives up the spoonduring the meal:.

4. Assist and guide the child as necessary in inserting the spooninto the dish, scooping and bringing it to his mouth. Hemight remove the spoon from his mouth by tipping it upward.Mother should become less available, but still remainnearby as the child learns to be more independent.

5. Let the child practice at the beginning of the meal whenhe is hungriest.

6. Use a bowl with a high edge or a "scoop plate"'with ahigh curved edge on one side. Position the scoop plateso the higher edge is on the side toward which he isscooping.

7. Let the child use a bowl with a non-slip bdttom or suctioncup which will prevent the bowl from skidding around whilechild is trying to scoop the food.

8. Serve lbods which are easy to handle with a spoon. Thinsoups and rolling peas are difficult for beginners. Foodswhich will stick to the spoon will make scooping andretaining food on the spoon easier. Some food suggestions:Stews with mashed or chopped meats, vegetables; stews withMashed or chopped meats, vegetables. Casserole or creameddishes using hamburger, meats, poultry, pork, fish, veg-etables which are chopped or thinly sliced. Rice may beadded to make it stickier; vegetables which are mashed,chopped; macaroni and cheese; spaghetti (short noodles);cooked cereal; soft rice with chopped meats, vege\:ables;

94

Page 83: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

17,

Spanish rice; junior or toddler foods; mashed pumpkin,squash, sweet potato; pudding; custard; poi; creamcheese; yogurt; cottage cheese; fruit sauces; icecream.

9. Let the child practice scooping by:a. Scooping wet or dry sand with a large spoon, wooden

spoon, or small spoon.b. Scooping soan suds, shaving cream from a pan or

bowl with a large or small spoon.c. Scooping uncooked macaroni or rice in a large box

with a large spoon.

Page 84: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.33

CoAktourcA--ri DIV

5. Makes Sounds For Certain Objects

Ob ective: Child will consistently use one sound to identify or requestjot' one particular object or person within 20 seconds ofobject/person presentatiOn, for 80% of the trial's, on 2 wit

of 3 consecutive days for a total of at least 3 objects/persons.

Materials: Favorite toys

- Procedure:1 A. Encourage child to vocalize for a,toy.

Carolina14h

p. 209

.,

1. Using a toy the child is interested in, e.g,'a ball,the caregiver will start the inferaction with "here is.

the ball" and giving it to the thild.-*

2. Give the.child a few seconds to play with the object, ,'

then ask for the Child to return it "give me the ball4

in a friendly-tone of voice. '

3. After two or three exchanges with the caretaker voca)-

izing each time, askIthg'child "do ybu want lie'bal)?"

and wait for the child to make a vocajization.

4. Return the toy imeediately updn,the onset ofan.vocal-

ization on the part of the baby except crying.

B. Encourage child to use specific sounds to identify specific,

objects.

Hanson, DSp: 151

1. Present an.object and label the object. Chjld repeats.,

sound. Example: Parent shows child a ball.

Parent says, "Ball."Child sAys, "Ba."Parent says, "That's right, ball."

2. If child does not respond correctly, repeat, "This is

a ball. Say ball."

3. Present objects for which the child already knows the'

'sound. Example:(b) for bottle or ball or bye

(m) for mommy(w) for water(d) for daddy, drink

4. When you know the child can almost always say the sound

for the object, require the child to say the sound to

request an object or activity. Example: Child must

say "d" before being let down.

5. Also pair sounds with different activities. Example:

"choo-choo" with train"p,p" with popbeads"grrr" with tiger puppet"varoom" with toy car.

6. Praise child for repeating sound or initiating sound

as case may be.

96

.o

Page 85: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Hanson, DS ,

p. 151

34

7. Keep a record of the sounds that your child pairs'with certain objects.

8. *Tell family members and friends what sounds thechild makes and ask them to require the child tomake these sounds before gettina Ihe object or,activity.

9. 'Be consistent. Once the child learns to make-thesound, require that s/he sa'y it all the time.

10. If child makes correct sound witgin 20 seconds ofobject presentation, mark (+). If child does not

vocalize or,produces incorrect response, mark(-).

. Repeat correct sound to child and encourage nim/her

to imitate you. If child imitates and gives correct

sound, give child object. Wait for appropriate time

to start another trial.

11. .If.child gets 80% of the trials corri,ct, pick another object.

C. Encouage child to Lise specific sounds to identify specific

people.

HELPNo. 2.29(1-4)p. 56

1. Make sure you name yourself "Da-da," or "Daddy,"

"Ma-ma" or "Mommy" when,you greet the child, when youpick the child up or when you call hith.

2. Reward the childts.correct use of a name, if heusually calls both parents, or'all people "Dada." Use

the name of the otherpareQt and/or people to helpthe child understand that each name is for a specific

person'.

3. Respond quickly when you are correctly named. Give

the child lots of praise for being coi-rect!4.. Show the child pictures of familiar people. Label the

pictures. Encourage the child to.point to whom you

name and to say the names. Use large clear pictures

the child can touch.

Page 86: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1 ,

Hanson,:DS. more cookie .down

p. 152.

potty. .book up .

1drink go mama/dada

5. After child produces cOrrect sound, repeat the correct

label (eg. "ball", "bottle") back to the child so that

he/she, hears the correct label..

. N

k

O. Encourage child toiuse his spetific sounds to request

specific objects..t-

4 1. After child learns to consistently use a specific

sound for a specifit object, encourage child to

-request for'theobject.2. %Child may indicate request by'gesturing toward obiect.

,Ask child "What do You want?" .If child continues

aesturina; label the object, and encourage child tg,,

request for the object uSinagthe sbund that he/she'

consistently uses for'that object. If necessary,

produce the first sounds of the word and encourage

the child to imttate the correct response. (see step B)

-p 3. If child sOontaneously uses a sound to request for an

objeci,.make sure you respond by giving him the object,

'if pOssible.

4 S,uggestioriS-for request words:

SuggeStions:

a

1. Do not be conceiiied or worried if the child's words are

difficult to understand. You can probabW recognize'the

words by context.

2. Do not correct the child directy. Proifide a gbod model

for the word phrase lhat s beim, mispronounced, e.g.,

.

if the infants says "poon" for "spoon" Say, "That's.

HtLP right, that's a spoon," .

No. 2.33(1-4)p. 57 3. Continue to talk to the child by naming-obieets in his

environment, by. describina,his activities ahdour

activitiqs.

4 'Do not yield to the temptation to say the vidrd the way

the child does, even if it sounds cute. The child thinks

'he is saying it correctly-and may be confused if ,epti mis-

, pronounce tke word.

9d

Page 87: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

(7,

A

,

. Criterion: Child will consistently ue one sound to identify or1444111, request for.one particurar'oblect/person, within 20

seconds of object/person presentation, for 80% of thetrials, on 2 out of 3"FoAsecutive days, for a'total ofat least 3 objects/person.

A

36 *

,

Nr.

Page 88: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

e_OGMITIVE:

,t

57.

.1. Imi4tes Familiar GeSture

Objective:

Materials:'

.procedure*:

Hanson, DS

P.,159

Child Will make the .same:gescure within 20 peconds

of adult modeling a gesture from child's repertoire

for at least 5 familiar gestures for 80/of the

trials on 2.1Cut of 3 consecutive days.

Toys/objects.that the 'child is familiar with

1. Place child in comfortable position so that

his/hen hands are.free to move.

2. Observe child in play and.the behaviors he/she ,

spontaneously performs. Choose one of these 1

actUms, accorling to the step child is ,

working on.

3. .Make the action a couple Of times then give

cue,"Do this, (child's name)" Repeat 2-3

times. Give child 20 seconds to respond-z.

4. If'he/she produces the required response within

20 seconds, mark (+). Praise child.

5. If child does not respond,correctly within 20

seconds, mark (-). 'Then go through tlie

correction procedure.

6. Correction Procedure: Go through step 3 of

Procedure again. If child does not respond to,

the prompt heMhe is working on, give him/her

more help (go back to previous prompt). If

child responds correct1Y, ,PraiSe child, Do not

use these corrections as trials.

7. If child gets 80% af the trials correct on 2. .

out of 3 6nsecutive days, go on to next step.

8. Important: Teach activities only under appro-,

priate conditions. For example, don't.

encourage,blowing "raspberries" during dinner

or banging the feeding spoon on the table:

Page 89: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

oollr

3

Steps:

Criterion:

58.

Child will make the s'ame gesture withini. 20 seconds ,a

of adult modeling:1. A gesture/action involving an object, from

child's repertoire(eg. banging 2 objects-

together, shaking 'objvt) A2._ A gesturel body action, not involving objectS,,'

from child's repetoire (eg. clap hands, tapknees.)

For each of above steps, go through the followtng. prompts, depending on child's movement patterns:

a) maximum prompt Oe. prompt at elbows or., shoulders through most of action)

b) moderate prompt.(ie. prompt at wrist, throughinitial part of,action)

c) mirlimuw prompt (ie. tap at wrist or hand)

d) no

Child will make the'same geSture within 20 secondsof adult modeling a gesture from child's.repertoire, for at least 5 familiar...gestures, for80%-of the trials-on2-out of-3-conseout4ve days.

10i

4

-1

Page 90: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

H ELP

No. 1.42 (1)p. 16

Hanson, DSp..158

I,

1. Observe the motor behaviors the child qhowsspontaneous-IS, toward objects or toys.. At this

time, they'are behavtors such as banging anobject on-the table, wavi6g an Object,.etc.When the child is*not engrosspd,in any activity,perform thls familiar action in front of him andthen tee tf,he makes any movement in.responseto you 'o'r imitates the bahavior.performed.

2. Choose.behavors that will be easy for the childto perform. Vsersome behaviors hat include amobject (examples: pound drum, knock overblocks, stack blocks; roll ball, shake rattle,'ring bell, pat table, blow feather) and other'behayiors without objects (examples:

.

pat-a-cake, wave bye-bye, open mouth, kisiing,movements, raise arm, 'itsy-bitsy spider,""so big" (child puts hands up to show "so big"),tongue clickS, cough).

A

'

0,1

1

Page 91: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4C4

V-1 A1E1 Moro R...(0a)-e-cl- .M6-sUt

8: Transferi Objectlb

20

Objective::Child will,grasp an object with one hand

then trans'fer. the object to the other

hand, within 20. seconds of the 2nd object

.beingeoffered, for, 80% of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive:days.

Materials:*4 Hansow,, DS

No.7

p.124

HELPNo.4.38(3)

HELPNo.4.38(3)p,116

k

a) RightHand to Left Handb) Left"Hand to Right Hand

Rattles in the shape of barbells, a clutch

or grasp ball, spoons, etc. .Try many different

objects to see which dbjects work best viih

your baby.

1. Let the child grasp tbe object with one .

hand then offer second object to the

same hand.

2. Encourage child to transfer the object .

to the other h#nd in order to obtain

2nd object, byksaying, "Put thein .the other hand" and/or "Get fh-E---

'(child's name)."

3. Help her/him transfer the first object,

if necessary4 then encourage her/him to

grasp the second object. 1.

If a child transfers the object to other

hand, praise her/him and mark (+). Show

her/him hovOeplay appropriately with the

2 objects e.g., banging them together,

shaking, etc.

5. If child does not transfer the object to

the other hand, mark (-). Then show

her/him.how to do it. Praise even

thaugh you assisted her/him.

6. When child gets 80% of the trials correct

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days, go on to

next step. 0

Hint: For the 2nd object, use one of child's

favorite toys (a toy you know that s/he

will definitely want).

0;3

S.

Page 92: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps:

V.

21

Use the following prompt, if neceJsary:..

a) maximum prompt (i.e., assist childwith a full-hand prompt through most

of the action),

b) moderate prompt (i.e., assist child at

Wrist, through part of the action). ,*

c) minimum prompt (i.e., assist child atelbow, through initial part of the

action).

d) no prot-,-

.

4.400"!

Criterion: / Child will grasp an.object with onehand then transfer the object to theother.hafid, within!hLseconds of the 2ndobject being offered, for 80% of the trails

on 2 out of 3 consecutlye days.

a) Right hand to Left hand

b) Left hand to Right hand

3.>

Page 93: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Suggestions:

HENo.A.

p.1164-5)

A

Hanson, DSp.124 A

No.7

.22

't

1. Let the Child hold a long-handled toyhorizontally with 2'hands. Bring the

toy to a vertical position until thechild releases the toy with one hand andmaintains grasp of the toy with the other

hand.

2. Let the child grasp ad object with one hand,then help her/trim tranaer the same objectto the other hand, if necessary.

3. Make a:small ball of masking tape and letthe child grasp the ball. Encdurage her/him

to pull the iape ball oft with.the otHer

hand.

4. Place a picture sticker on the palm of the.child's hand and encourage Her/him topull it off with the other hand.

5. Play games bringing your child's handstogether.

, 6. GWe child objects that are too big toYhold in one hind and must be held in bothso child becomes accustomed to holding

objects with both hands at midline.

1 0;i

Page 94: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

PIPE. itilsra.( PgAct-i 4 6eAsP)

15. Uses Neat Pincer Grasp

HELPNo.4.52p. 118

Objective:.

Materials:.

HELPNo. 4;52

Procedure: p. 118

a.

.47

The thild grasps.a.titly object

t4 sila of.aprecise thumb and index finger

opposition,

Child will independently pick up onetiny object using a pincer grasp within,.

20 seconds of object presentation,for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

rs).

Use a raisin, dry cereal, other bits of .

food, a tiny bell, a pellet, a button, or

narrowed pegs. 'Be sure the child does not

put unsafe objects in her/his mouth.

1: Place a tiny object on the table or

any surface for the child to grasp

one at a time.

2. Use tiny objects which do no easily

roll away when the child tries to

grasp them,

3. Encourage child to pick up the object,

by saying, "Pick up the , (child's

name)" or "Get the TrEhild's

nameW .

4. pr child picks up the object using a

pincer grasp within the appropriate

time, praise, and mark (+). After"-

child picks up object, show her/him

the appropriate thihg to do with the

object, if necessary.

5. If child does not pick up the object

appropriately, within the appropriate

time, mark (-). 'Show her/him how to

do it, by giving the amount of

assistance needed by the child.

A

Page 95: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

Hahson, OSp. 124No. 5.3

_tf

If necessary guide your child throughthe activity for a few times'until thechild is able to do this indgpendently.You aould begin the guiding or promptingby'plating.yovr hand entirely over.your.chileg hand and assisting the child inpicking up the object. Over time you

could gradually remove thg prompt.oramount of guidance untilwou merely'touch the child's arm or hand.

Praise child even if you assisted her/him.....,through the motibn. Show her/him what to 4

do with the object when s/he has it in

'hand.

6. Practice this task as often is possible

during.the day.

If child gets 80%4of the trials correcton 2 out of 3 consecutive days, go onto the next step.

fr

10/

Page 96: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps,:

Criteriod:

49

4,

1. Child will pick up 1 tiny object using .

a pincer'grasp

a) 60 seconds -

b) 45 secondsc) 30 secondsd) 20 seconds,

of object presentation.

go.

'1'4

For each of the abpye steps, u4e the

following prompts, ifjlecessary:.

a) ma)dmum prompt (i.e., assist.child with a

.full-hand,prompt tnrough most of the actiion)

b) moderate prompt (i.e.; assist child at

wrist, through part of the action) .

--

c) mimimum prompt (i.e. assisrchild at elboWl

through' initial-part of the actipn)

d) no prompt

[*precaution: .a) Be sure child does not9

. .put unsafe objeFts in mouth.

b) An adult should be presentwhen working on this activity.]

Child will independently pick up 1 tiny object

using a pincer grasp within 20 seconds of

object presentation for 84 pf the trials on

2.out of 3 consecutive days. 0

lOô

\'1-4

Page 97: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Suggestions:

Hanson, DS

. p. 121

No. 7.3,4

HELPNo. 4.52(3-6)p. 118 .

50

1. Present objects on a-somewhat roughsurface at first to make picking themlip easier, then switch to a smooth surface.

2. Objects with strings and knobs alsowork well for this activity, such as*

pull toy,.balloon on string, yarn,

knobs on blocks,,etc.

3. Place a tiny object in a cup or eggcarton .cup to encourage the child*tograsp the object with her4his thumb

and index finger. .

4. Place a short, colorful piece of string

on the carpet, on the table, or even 'old

the child, where s/he,can easily see and

reach for'it by graspin With her/his

tbumb and index finger.

5.'Provide bits of food at snack time to

encourage finger feeding as well as

neat pincer grasp.

6. For the older delayed child:

1) Let her/him make a collage usingvarious items, such as shells,sticks, macaroni, beads,'twigs,.

4 leaves, string.-

2) Let the child pinch and pull playdough with her/hiS thumb and index'

fingertips.

3) Ltt the child pinch clothes pins.Let her/him remcve the pins placedon the rim pf a can. Let her/him

drop them into_the can, Then lether/him pinch and place the pinson the rim of the can her/himself.

Tactfully provide assistance, if

necessary.

Page 98: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

kIP M oro (2-

19. Places Circle, Square, Triangle Shapes into Form Board

Objective:

Materials:

,Procedure:

53

When presented with a form board with atircular .hole, a square hole, and atriangula.r hOle,.child will andependentlyPlace the 3 shapes (circle, square, triangle) .

into the appropriate holes, within oneminute of presentation of the shapes, for

..80% of the trials, on 2 out cf 3 cpnsecutive

days,

Shapes; shapebox; shape puzzle; form board.

1. Place child in a comfortable.position,. with arms and hands free to manipulate

shapebox/puz71.e. .

2, Place shapebox so that it is easy forchiid-to manipulate e,g, loW enough.so .

that child can see holeS in which toput shapes in.

3. Present shapes in front of child. Give

cue, "Put the in, (name) ".

4. 1f child places the correct shipe inthe appropriate hole independentlywithin the designated time limit, ,

mark (+), and praise child. .

5. If child does not place the correctshape in the appropriate hole inde-pendently, within the designated timelimit, mark (-). Show child how to

complete the task. Remember to praise

child even if you helped her/him.

6, When doing this task, other activitiesto help child learn:

i) Describe theoshapes to the child.

ii) Label the shape e.g. "circle".iii) Allow child to feel and play with

the different shapes.iv) Presentthe shapebox t different ,

angles so that the child is focusingon the shape of the hole and not the

position of the hole.

t..

IMPORTANT: Do these activities afteror before child is asked todo objective.This makes it less confusingfor child.

7. When child gets 80% of the trials correct,on 2 out of 3 consecutive days, go on to

the next step.

ho1.

Page 99: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps:

i

1

1

54

e 6

,.

A. 1. When presented with only the circular hole,

child will place the circle shape into the

appropriate hole, within:.

a) 1 minute, b) 45 seconds.

c) 30 seconds

of presentation of shape,

2. When'presented with only the square hole,

dhild will place the square shape intothe approprtate hole, with*

.

a) - 1 minuteb) 45 secondsc)' 30 seconds

of presentation of shapes,

3. When Presented with a circular hole and a

square hole, child will place the circle

and square shape into the appropriate

holes,..within:

a) 2 minutesb) 1 minute

of presentation of shapes.

.4. (Then presented with only the triangular

hole, child will place the triangular shape

into the appropriate hole, withinL,'

a) 1 minuteb) 45 secondsc) 30 seconds

of presentation of shapes.

%

5. When presented with a circular hole, a square

hole, and a triangular hole,'child will

independently place the 3 Shapes'into theapprqpriate holes, within:

a) 5 minutesbA 3 minutesc) 1 minute

B. For each Of above steps, 'use the fallowing

prompts, if necessary:.

a) maximum prompt (i.e..assist child with afull.lhand prompt thrOugh most of task);.

b) moderate promptAi.e. assist child at wrist

through part of task)k..c) minimum prompt (i,e. agsist child at elbow

through initial part of the taskl

d) None. '

e .

:.

..

Page 100: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

o

4

:

,

,

Criterion:

i,

1.

,t

4,

,

,

55

Whenyresenied with a form board with acircular,hole, a .square hole, and a

triangular hole,rchild will independently

place the 3 shapes (circle, square;triangle), into the appropriate holes,within oneminute of presentation ofthe shape, for 80% of the trials, on2 out of 3 consecutWe days,

,

.112

-

,

Page 101: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Form'Board Suggestions

A. Round Shape:

4

HELP

No.1.7.1(1-6)"

p.25 -

56

I, Let the child place small uice cans in

matching holes cut in a milk carton.

2. Let the child place pegs in a pegboard.

3, Teach the child tophelp you put round lids

on containers Sbch as thermos bottles; dusting

powder containers. (S/he cannot twist them

yet,)

4. Make round indentations in the sand or.dirt

while at the beach or at home and let the

child place rocks of the same size and shape

.into these indentations. Other materials

which can be used for thfs gaMe are bottecovers, poker chips, and circles made from

foam, wood, plastic or sponge,

5. Formboards - General Suggestions::.,

a) Start with one circle piece and one hole

in the formboard.

b) Start with deep holes cut into the form-

board and with pieces which fit in

completely. Let the child see thedifference in putting it completely in,

having it on the board or having it

partially in.

CI Start with a piece with a large knobbed

handle. Handles can be made by gluing

on small; empty spools of thread, large

beads, wooden knobs, etc. Later, use,

smaller handles made with small pieces

of wood, plastic, slionge, large screws

or nails.to replace the larger handles.

d) Let the child feel the round puzzle

piece and the inside edges of the form-

board.where the round piece fits. You

may want to line parts of thepuzzle-with textures to aid the child.

e) Give the.child time to learn by trial

and error before you begin to direct

.some of her/his efforts.

f) Ask the child to put the circle back.in

the board after s/he has removed it..

Point to the hole if.the child 4oes not

respond or appear.to understand. . Lf more t

help is needed, show the child how to put

the round pieCe into the hole and describe

to the child what you are *doing. Encourage

the 'child ta repeat your action.

lij

Page 102: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'

.0

HELPNo.1.71(1,6)p.25

B. Square Shape: .

HELPNo1.86(2-4)p.29

57

g) If the cbild cannot get into the hole

and:appears to be tiring or becoming

frustrated, help her/him. Place yot

hand near the bole. The child can .

use your hdr(d as a backstop and you

can help.slide the piece in the hold.

h) Help the-child by guiding the piece in

the hole by holding the piece with the

child, The child neeenot let go of the

piece as lgng as s/he can consistently

put it in the hole,

6. Use a board or make one with one large and

one small circle. Let the child try to

put the pieces in correctly, Should the

child plAce the small one in the large hole,

do not say "No, that's the wrong hole" or

"Nd7Fut it here." Let the.child make her/

hiS own corrections. If s/he does not

correct herself/Omself, point.out the error

in a friendly, helpful way, ,Encourage her/him

to try again.

Make spare holet in the sand at the beach

ustng square boXes, iiieces of wood, bTocks.

Let the child put the square object into

the matching hole.

2. Use a formboard with circles and squares.

3.. Suggestions4for making formboards out of

scrap materials.

a) U-s-e heavy cardboard to make a formboard.

Cut out squares with a razor knife. Glue

the squares together to make the puzzle .

piece. Glue the rest of the cardboard

together to make the puzzle board. The

thickness of the puzzle piece may be

greater than the pulJe board.

b) Use heavy cirdboard for the Tormboard,but

a different material-fór.the:thaped pieces.Inverted_plastic ice cream cups and spray

can covers can be used for.cirPles.- Half

pint milk cartons or wood'or plastic toy

blocks make good squares,

c) Use styrofoam and sponge. Packing styro-

foam and sponge are easily cut for,

appropriate shapes.

d) Use an osld telephone directory for the

formboard. The depth of the hoTes can

be quick19 changed by flipping.theyages,*

11 4'

a.

Page 103: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

58

C. Triangle Shape:

r---1, Refer to Suggestion A (Places 'round

piece tih formboard), Be sure to

point out the triangle's angles and

points.

2. dut triangles out of wood, foam,sponge, plastic or find triangular

boxes and containers. Take them to

HELP the beach and make triangular holes in

No1.114(1-3,5) the sand. Let the child put the

p. 37 triangular objects into the matching

holes.

3. Use a formboard with a combination oftrianglet, circles and/or squares.

4, Use a fonmboard with three triangles

of different.sizes. Let the child :

remove the triangles;from the formbaard. Arrange the triangles so thecorrect triangle is next to the hole

in which it belongs. Place the triangles

at random after.the child can successfullymatch them to the correct hole,.

9

a

115

Page 104: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pgz- itexze .

3. Matches Objects to Pictures

Objective:

1,

Materials:

Procedure:

r.

When presented with a choice of:

a) 3 different objects (1 target object,

2 distractor objects), child willcorrectly point to or touch the object'

that'matches theetarget picture, within

20 seconds arthe'verbal 'cue, "Find tile

onelthat's the same,". for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

b. 3 pictures of diffei'ent objects (1 target

. picture, 2.distractor pictures), childwill.correctly Oint to or touch the

. picture that matches the targerobject,within Nkseconds cif the verbal cue, "Find

the one that's the same," for 80Z'of

the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.,

Target and disti-actor objects and pictures.

(Use simple, familiar objects, objects that

the dhild uses in daily livihg.)

0 I. Present an array of objects/Octures of

objects consisting of the target object/

picture and the required number of distractors.

(in the caseof Step Al, there will be no

distractor objects/pictures.). Present the

objects/pictures in different positions on

each trial.

2. Encouratie child to watch you setting up

.the array, without reaching for the objects.

Use cue, "Put your hands down."

3. Hold target object/picture in haneor place

it in front of array. Encourage child to

attend to target object/picture. YoUmay

label.the object/picture for the child.

Then ask child to "Find the one that's Oe

same." (Emphasize "same".)

4. If child reaches for or points to correct

match, within 20 seconds, mark (A-) and

praise child. Tell child "good, you found

the one that's-the same." May label the

target object again. 'SW./ child how the

object and its corresponding picture is the

same.

5. If child does not.reach for or point to

correct match, within 20 seconds, prompt

child givino only as much assistance as is

needed.

Page 105: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

dfe

S.

, Mark (-) if you had to prOmpt child morethan the objectiVe states.,

6. Praise child even if you had to prompt her/him

to respond corredtly. tell child, "Good, you

fotznd the one that's the same."4 May label

the target object again. Show child how the°

object and .its correspondifig picture is the

same.

7. After child completes match, may work onother goals/directions that the child is

learning e.g., "Give me", "Put in." .

Page 106: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

Steps:

Criterion:

9 ":

A. 1. .When presenteb with a choice of 1 object/

picture (a target object/pictures no dis-,

.'tractor aject/picture), child will tor-rectly,point.to or touch the respectiveobject or 'picture that matches the target'picture/object within 20 seconds of theverbal cue, "Find the one that's the.ame."

2. When'presénted with a chbice of 2 objects/pictures' of 2 different objects (1 target

object/pTcture, and 1 distractor object/picture), child will correctly point to

or touch the raspective object or picture

that matches the taraet picture/objett,within 20 setonds of the verbal cue, "Find

the one that's the same."

3." Wh.en presented with a choice'gf 3 objectsi/ ,

pictures of 3 different objects (1 target

object/picture and 2'distractor,ob1ects/pictures), child will correctly point to

or touch the respective object or. picture

that matches the target picturt/obieKt,within 20 seconds of the verbal cue, "Find

.the one that's the same."

-

4. For each

,

of the above steps, use the following

prompts, if.necessary.

0 maximum prompt 'i.e., point to thecorrect object/picture and bring the

child's hand to withln 3 inches of the

correct object/picture.

ii). moderate prompt i.e., holding down

distractor picture/object and.pointingto the correct match.

iii) minimum prompt i.e., pointing to the

correct match.

iv) no prompt

When presented with a choice of:

a) 3 diffarent objects (1 target object,

2 distractor objects), child will cor-rectly point to or touch the object that

matches the target picture, kithin 20,sec-

ends of the verbal cue, "Find the one that's

the same," for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.'

A

Page 107: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

,

a

.%

r

b) 3 pictures of different objects ( 1 targetpicture, 2 distractor pictures), the4ildwill correctly point tO or touch the pictdre

', that matches the target Object, within 20.seconds.of verbal cue', "Find the one that'sthe same," for 80% of the trials on 2 out

'of 3 consecutive days.

..

3

d

b

r

,

...

i.

..

:

:

el.'s.4

,

Page 108: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I

V

,

:.

a

,

.Syaaestions:

$

HELp

No. '1.107p. 35

,

A

V

.1 .

11 tr

)

e %

11

I. 'Start with photographs of the objects.If they are pot available find pictureswhich closely,resemble the objects. . 0

2. Show tile child a'familiar object. Name it

tor if the child can verbalize, let her name

it. Show the child a picture of the same .

_object. Name it or have the child name it.Show the child both the object and thepicture 'and compare them, Talk about their,

p sameness, point out the' obvious similarities.

3. Show the child a familiar object. Then

show him two pictures (one of the object,

the other of a very dissimiilar object).

Ask her to point out the picture whichmatches the object. .

4. Show the child a familiar picture of

a familiar object. Then show him two objects

(one identical to the pict)ee, the other,

very dissimilar). .Ask him to give you the .

object which matches the picture.

5. .Show the child a picture of .a familiarobject in the house or classroom. Have

the.child find the actual object in thehouse or classroom. -Be sure it is near

the child and within his reach.

a.;

..

0:

Page 109: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

- pRe AGAbElt4 IC.

. 2. .Discriminates Ojects. .

Objective:

._

Material:

-.Procedure:

-.

r

51

t;

When presented with a choice of 3 objects

(a target object and2 distractor objects),

child will correetly point to or toucb the

target object within 20 seconds .of the verbal

cue, "Find the ," for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 cOn-iiE&ive days, for a total

of 10 objects. .

.Target objects, distractor objects.

Use: a) objects that are familiar to the

child.b) objects that are functional for

the child-i.e. objects that the'

child uses in her/his daily activities.

1. Present an array of objects consigtinq of the,

target object and the required number of ..,

distractor objects. (In the case.of Step

Al, there will be no distractor objects.)

Present the objects in different positions

on each trial.

.2. Encourage child tO watch you setting up the

array, without reaching for the objects.

Useftue, "Put your hands down."

3. When array is set up, askIchild "Find the

." (Emphasize label of target

object.) Other cues: "Show me ."

..

4. If child reaches for or Points to corre,ct

object within 20 seconds, mark (+) and'

praise child. Tell child "Good, you found

the " or repeat the label of thetarg-E-53ect, e.g. "Ball." Give child

an opportunity to play with the object for

a short while before proceeding to next

trial.

5., If child does not reach for or point to

correct object independently withAn 20

seconds, prompt child using only as much

prompting as is needed (See.Step 8). Mark

(-) if you had to prompt child more than

the objective staths.

6. Praise child even if you had to prompt

her/him to respond correctly. Tell child,

"Good, you found the __" or repeat the

label of the target oF.f&t. Give child an

opportunity to play with the object for a

short while before proceeding to next trial:

Page 110: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

-

.

52

7. After child identffies coreect object,child may work on other goals e.g. followingdirections, prepositions, functional object

use. 4

S. Suggested Objects: .

is....

cup ball brush (other toys)

spoon gbok comb

plate doll cookiebox crayon chair

I.

4

CS

N.

Page 111: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Criterion:

53

4.

A. 1. When presented with a choice of 1

object (a terget object, no distractor

objects), child will correctly pointtoor tolich the taraet object within 20 seconds

of the verbal cue, "Find the (taraet object).;

2. When presented with a choice of 2 objects

(a target object, and 1 distractor object), ,

child will correctly point to or touch the

target object within 20 seconds of the

verbal cue, "Find the (target object).

3. When,presented with a choice of 3 objects

(a target object, and 2 distractor objects),

child will correctly point to or touch the

target object within 20 seconds of the

verbal cue, "Find the (target-object)'.

B. For each of the above steps, use the following

prompts, if necessary.

i) maximum prompt (i.e. point to thecorrect object and brim] child's hand

to within 3 inches of correct object.),/

ii) moderate prompt (i.e. holding downdistractor object and pointing to the

,target object)

iii) minimum prompt (i.e. pointingto target

object)

iv) no prompt

When presented with a choice of 3 objects

(a target object and 3 distrector objects),

child will correctly point to or touch the

target object within 20 seconds of the vesrbal

cue, "Find the ", for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for a total of

10 objects.

123

Page 112: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. Suggestions: 1.

pHELPNo. 1.93 (1-5)

2.

3.

p. 31

4.

5.

1

54

,

Label objects for the child. Discuss

things around her/him.

Discuss body parts and clothing when you .

bathe and dress the child.

Discuss the food, the utensils, the kitchenfurniture and things when you feed the child.

Give the child simple directions to seeif s/he knows the names of things.

Discuss what you routinely see when youride the car, such as traffic lights, stopsigns, trucks, buses, fire stations.

*

1,

I

4.

..

,

e

Page 113: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

(Social)6. Responds To Own Name

Objective:

Materials:

Procedure:

Hanson, DSP. 172

CarolinaP. 217, 21915c, 15e

12

The child will turn toward a person calling his/her name

from a distance of 5 feet within 10 'seconds of verbal cue,

for 80%,of the trials tn 2 put of 3 consecutive days.

None

1. Child should be occupied-in with an activity - not

attending to person calling his/her name:-

2. Always use the saMe name for.your child. If the child's

name is Jim, call him JiM and not Jimmy or Jack. It

N,makes it easier for baby to learn his correct name. .

.,.

[3. Standing'several feet-away from the child, call his/her

.

name.softly and olcserveJlis/her reaction.

4. If he/she does not respond, prompt by:

a. Calling his/her name a little -louder, or )

b. Pair calling his/her name with a gentle touch which

guides him/her to turn his face toward the source of

sound. '.

c. If necessary attract the child's attention by physi-

cally turning the child toward you when you call her/

his name or bx..using another attention-getter such as

a toy. GradudIly remove it until you need only say

the child's name to get her/his attention._

d. Gradually reduce the prompt so that he/she learns to

respondito the sound of his/her name being called.

Also allow increasing time (1 second, then 2 and 3

seconds) efter calling his/her name before providing

hfm with assistance in turning his/her head toward you.

12D

4

Page 114: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Steps:

13

4.

The child will turn toward a persOn calling his/her name from

a distance of:

1) 1 foot, within 10 seconds of verbal .cue.

2) 3 feet, within 10 seconds of verbal cue.

3) 5 feet, within 10 seconds of verbal cue.

From the above steps, use the following prompts if necessary:

a) turn child's head to face parent0 turn child's head part wayc) tap child's cheek in direction of parent

d) no prompt (independently)

Criterion: The child will turn toward a person callino his/her namewithin 10 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 115: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

14

Suggestion:1. Call the child by name often. For example: d6ring-

feeding or dress-ing, "Jim, r'aise your hands."

2.. Vary yoOr pos,ition and place in the room as well as the 4

pitch and intensity of your voice as you call to him/her.

J.

Page 116: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

..

t

a

I

li

0

Appendi x BA

Curri cul ar Objecti ves,

/

-

4

t

,

I

tr

I,

Page 117: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,

I

. GROSS MOTOR: Tummy (Prone)

Objecti yes :

1-. Lifts Head to Clear Nose

" Child Will lift head high enough to clear liose from floor, maintain this

position,for5 to 8 seconds, before turning head to one side, while lying.

on tummy, for 80% of the trials on 2,out of 3 consecutive days..,

2. Forearm Support Lifts Head td.450 in Midline

Child will lift head at 450 angle to the floor for a duratiop of one

minr4e keeping head in midline while lying on tummy with forearm sopport,

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Rolling Tummy to BackChild will roll from Stomach to back without assistance'within one minute

when placed on the floor with favorite object out of reach, for 80% of

the trials on 2 out of 3 ,consecutive days.,

4. Supportir4 Weight on extended arms, head 900, Chest Off Floor

Child will lift head at 900 angle to the floor while supporting weight on

open hands-, straight arms- and chest off floor or a.minimum of 1 minute when

'lying on tummy for 80% of trials on 2 oUt of 3 consecutive days. c%

5. Supporting Weight on Forearms and Reaching Out with One Arm

Child placed on tummy will reach out.to swipe or.touch an object, within

20 seconds of object presentation'while supporting self on opposite -fore-

arm,,for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. .

6. Child Alternates Between FOl-earm Sup ort and "Arms Back" Activit )

When lying on his .stomach, the child spontaneously alternates between

arching his back with his elbows bent and off the supporting surface--

hands near ears, and steady support on elbows with head at 900 angle ,for

80% of the trials_on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

7. Locomotion Forward on Tumm Usin Arms Crawlin , then Arms and Le s

Child will independently move forward, stomach on floor moving one leg

at .a time in an alternating pattern) .a distance of 24 inches (2 feet;

61.0 cm) within one minute after a cue is given for 80% of the trials

. on 2 out of 3 consecutive days'.

8. Assumes Independently a Hands and Knees Position With the'Tummy Off the

Floor ,

Child will ass,ume a hands and knees position with tummy off the floor inde-

pendently within 20 seconds of verl?al cue and maintain this posttion for 30

seconds for 80% of the trials on 2 ou of 3 consecutive days.,

,

i9. Rocking Forward and Backwards in a Hands and Knees Position

Child will independently assume a hands, and knees position and shift weight

forwards and backwards 4-5 times for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 con-,

secutive days.

I .

1 2 ,)

.3

Page 118: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

;

.0

4 GROSS MOTOR: Tummy (cont'd)

10. . Pla s with To s in an Asymmetrical Sitting, Sidelying Position (Activity).

Chi17( wil manipu ate o jects'p aces to t e si e in an asymetrica a

f sitting, half sidelying position when presented with toys, for 80% of the, trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. .

11. Moves Forliard on Hands and Knees (Creeping)Child will independently move forward 2feet in_an alternating pattern onhands and knees (one !land and.opposite knee forwards then other hand and'opposite knee forward, and so on) with stomach off rloor within one minuteafter cue is given for 80% of the&trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

12. Reaching, with One. Arm on Hands and Knees

Child.will reach and touch an.object at an arm's length while supportingweight on one hand and knees within 20 seconds of toy presentation for80% of the trials on 2:out of 3 consecutive days.

0

13. Child Will Move Forward on Hands and Feet; "Bear Walking" (Activity)Chilcinl move forward on haTai--aTa feet two feet wiTEin 20 seconds ofcue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. This is alsoknown as "plantigrade creeping" or "bear vilking"..

14. Child Will Creep Independently Up and Down 2-3 StairsChild will creep independently up and down 2-3 stair steps (about 7 inchhigh stair step)* for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.*or hitches down on bottom. Hitching is scooting on bottom while sitting.

Page 119: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

<I

GROSS MOTOR: Back (Supine)

Objectives:

1. Turns head side to side in res ohSe to visual'or auditor stimUli'While

on'back. j

Child will turn "head freely side to Side in response to visual Of- auditory sttmuli

, while on his back wittiiii" 20 seconds of cue ibr 8 Of'tke trialt 2-61i1 of 3.

'consecutive days:

;,c- Child bends and.strai htens arms and legs in a "kicking" m4ion, kicking legt"

a ternate y. ActivityChild will bend and straighten arms and legs in a "kicking" motion, kfcks (Tegs

alternating) within 15 seconds of presentation of toy or an adult or spontariegusly

for 80% of the trials on'2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Child will bring her/his hand(s) to her/his mouth.

A. Child will bring right and/or left hand to mouth spontaneougly for 80% ofthe

trials, on.2 out of 3 consecutive days.. .

B. Child will bring both hands to mouth and/or midline spontaneously or wittiin:.

20 seconds of presentation of toy for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consk-futiv

days.

4. Child maintains head in midline position, while on back.

Child maintains head in midline for 60 seconds while on back for 80% of the 'trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. .:

5. Child williplay with knees, feet in the air, while on its back.

Child will reach and touch knees and feet in the air, while lying on his/her

back within 20 seconds of physical prompt or spontaneously for 80% of the triaTs

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. S etrical rolling side tO side.Child will roll symmetrically side to side when placed in supine and recover t-D a

midline position within 20 seconds of physical prompt or spontaneously for 80% of t

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

7. Rolling back to tummy.Child will roll continuously from back to stomach without assistance within 30 sec

onds when Oriced on the floor surrounded by several favorite objects out 'of t'each

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

8. Child will lift bottom off the floor, pushing with feet flat, while on its back. .

170711137).Child will lift hips (bottom) off the floor maintain for 20 seconds,.wile

lying on her back and pushing with feet flat on the -floor for 80% Of the trials..

for 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

9. Child lifts head while on its back.

Child will lift head one inch whilelying on her back, within 20 seconds of I

presentation of an object or spontaneously for 80% of t ials on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

13i

Page 120: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

GROSS MOTOR: Upright

Objectives:

1. Hold Head Steady - Held at Shoulder

Child will hold head steady in an upright position for 20 seconds while

held supported at the shoulder.for 80% of the trials bn 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

2. Hold Trunk Steady - Held at Hips

Child will hold body (trunk) and head upright and s'teady for one minUte when

held at hips against adult body for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive'

days.

3. Sits Supported - Head Steady

'Child will hold head in an upright position to the body when placed in a

sittingposition. Child will maintain this upright position for one minute

for.80% of the'trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Sits with Minimum Supports'

Child will sit for one minute.with body in upright positfon (upper body

straight, lower back rounded) when held at the hips for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Sits Self-Supported by Arms and Hands

Child will sit independently self-supported by ars and hands for one minute

when placed on firm surface, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

6. Sits, No Support.Child will sit independently with no support, head and back straight, for

oneminute when placed in a sitting position on a firm Surface, for 80%

of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

7. Raises Self to Sitting from Back

Child will move from lying on back or stomach to sitting by rotating

toward the side, pushing up on straight arms, rotating the hips and,upper

legs, and straighteningto sitting position within 20 seconds of verbal

cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 cont.icutive days.

8. Bears Own Weight.Child will support body weight for one minute when held at chest, feet flat

on theefloor for 80% of tfIWNtrials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

9. Stands with Minimum Support.

Child will support own body for one minute when placed in standing position,

feet flat on the floor when held at the hands by parent for 80% of the

trials on 24out of 3 consecutive days.

4

132

Page 121: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

#,

a

GROSS MOTOR: Upright (cont'd)

10. Stands at Furniture -

Child will Stand in an erect positionOtt; feet'flat on tbe floor and hands

on top of-furniture when placed facing furniture for at least one minute

for 80% of the trIals on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

11. Pulls to Stand

Child will pull self to standing by coming to kneeling, p ling to half

kneeling, then to a straight standing position facing a fu niture support

within 20 seconds of verbal cue and maintains this position for 30 seconds

for BO% of the trials on.2 out af 3 consecutive days.

12. Lowers Self from Standing to Sit

Aen standing by furniture for support, the child will lower self from

.

standing to sittina position within 20 seconds of verbal cue tor 80% of

the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

13. Cruises'(Walks Holding Onto FurnitUre)

Child will walk sideways 10 steps, while supporting her/Himself at furniture,

within one minute of verbal cue for 80% of the,trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

14. Walks.with Support ,

Child will take 5 steps forward when supported at the hands, the shoulders;

or at hips, within one minute of physical cue (holding child's hands) for

'80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

15. Stands, No SupportChild will stand alone without support for one-minute within 20 seconds of

verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

16. Walks When Led by One Hand

Child will walk 5 steps forward when led by one hand within one minute of

physical cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

17. Stoops and RecoversChild will stoop to floor from standing and then raise self to standing

position again within 20 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

18. Walks Alone, No Support

Child will take 10 consecutive flatfooted steps forward within one minute

of verbal cue for 80%of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Additional Activities

A. Upright (Kneeling)

B. Upright (Standing)

Page 122: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

GROSS MOTOR - ADVANCECOACTIVITIES

I. Advanced Walking Skills

1. Walks'Sideways tActivity)..Child wiTT move sideways without support '1 to steps in either direction;

(feet are not expected to cross over),within 0 seconds of verbal cue for.

4- 80% of the trials.on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2-4 Walks Backwards (Activity)-Child will independently walk in a backward direction for 6 feet within

30 seconds of Verbal cue for 80% ofthe%trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

3; Pulls Toy Behind While Walking (Activity)

The child will pull a toy' behind him while walking independently for a

distance of 6 feet within 30 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the trials

on,2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Carries Lar e To While Walking (Activit )

Teci carries a arge o ject with one or both hands without assistance

for a distance of 6 feet within 30 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Pushes and Pulls Large Toys or Boxes Around the Floor (Activity)

The child will push (pull) large toys or boxes around tli-J71-156F independently

for a distance of 3 feet within 30 Secorids of verbal cue for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. Stands on Tiptoes (Activity)The child comes up on her/his toes for 10 seconds within 10 setonds of

verbal cue'for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. .

7. Walks on Tip-Toes a Few Steps (Adtivity).

The child stands on tip-toes with hips and knees straight and takes 2 out

of 3 steps forward independently within 30 seconds of verbal cue for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3-consecutive days.

8'. Walks on Tip-Toes Ten Feet (Adtivity)

-The child will independently walk on tip-toes for a distance.of 10 feet

within'30 seconds of verbal cue foi. 80% of the,trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

II. Running.

9. Runs - Hurried Walk Activ

'The child in able to walk idly maintaining one foot on the ground at all

times. (Body is held stiff] upright with eyes fixed on the ground)) for

80% of the trials.on 2 oUt. 3 consecutive days.

0. 'Runs Fairly Well (Activity)

Objective: The child is able to rUn independently (an activity jn which

neither foot is touching the grOund during the same phase of the movement

with the child being balanced, her/his arms and legs alternating smoothly)

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 123: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

GROSS MOTOR - ADVANCED ACTIVITIES - cont'd

11. Runs and'Sto s Inde endentl , Avoidin. Obstacles Attivit

Tecidis ab e.to in epen entyrun and stop an avoid obstacles without

'falling for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 con cutive days.

12. Make Sitarp'Turns Around Cornett'When'ROnninq Activityl

The child is able to turn easily when running without losing balance or

falling down for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 conseptive days.

III.-Recovery. Activities

13. 5._qui)Child has sufficient balance to play on the floor for 2 minutes in a squatting.

position for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

14. Picks U 'TO From Floor WithOUt.Fallin Activit

C ild will'squat down or bend'over and.pick up-a toy, and maintain

sufficient balance to stand up again within 20 seconds of verbal cue for

.80% of the trials on 2 oUt of 3 consecutive days.

15. Bends OVerand Looks Through Legs (Activity)

The child it 'able to bend over and look through her legs for 3 seconds within

.30.,seconds of verbal cue (knees slightly bent as she loOks backwards between

the legs.) for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

IV; Stair and Climbing Skills

16. Walk§ Upstairs With One Hand Held (Activity)

Child Will walk upstairs while holding the hand of an aduli and placing one

Ibot up ind then moving the other foot up onto the same step within oneminute

rs Holding Rail - Both Feet on Step (Activity)./1)

.of verbal cud for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

17. Child Will Walk Upst

Childwill independently walk up 5 steps holding onto a railing or wall with

one hand, placing both feet on one 'step within 1 minute of verbal cue for

'$0% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. (The child'S feet do not

yet altellhate.)

18. Child Will Walk U stairs Alone - Both Feet on Step (ActiVity)

Child will independently walk up 5 steps without the use of railing or

wall placing both feet on one step within 1 minute of vetbal cue for 80%

'of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

19. Walks DOwnstairs With Ube Hand Held (Activity)

Child will walk downstairs while holdThrffii-Thand of an idult and placing

one foot down and then moving the other foot onto the same step within one

minute of verbal-cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of .3 consecdtive days.

20. Child Walks Downstairs HoldirRatl':. Both Feet on Step (Attivity). ,

Child will independently wal 5,steps Kolding.onto a railing or wall

with one hand, placing both -feeton.one step within 1 minutecOf verbal cue

for 80% of the trials on 2.out of 3 consecutive days. (The child's feet

do not yet alternate.) .

"

21. Child Will Walk-Downstairs Alone - Both Feet'on'Ste Activit

1 u wi in epen ent y wa own steps, p acing .oth eet on one step,

within 1 minute of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days. (The feet do not yet alternate.)

Page 124: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

11

GROSS'MOTOR - ADVANCED ACTIVITIES - cont'd

22. Child Will Walk Upstairs Alternatin4 Feet (Activity).The,child will independently walk up 5.regular size stairs without the

use of,a railing or the assistance of an adult within 1 Minute of verbal

cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive'days. (Alternating ,

foot pattern is now used.)

23. WalldDownstairs Alternating'Feet (ACtiVity)The child will independently walk down 5 regular siZe stairs withfutrthe

'

use of a railing or the assistance of an adult within 1 minute of verbal

tue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of-3 consecutive days. (Alternatingfoot pattern is now used.) A

24. Gtoes_qp and Down Slide (Activit.)The child will independently climb a ladder and go down the slide within

minute of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.,

:Chair Skills.25. C1iMbt'Int6"AdUlt'Chair (ActiVity)

Child will climb int an adult-sized chair within 1 Minute of verbal cue

for 80% of ne trial on 2 out pf.3 consecutive days.

%)-

26. Climb Forward oiIdilt Chair Turn Around and Sit Activit

Child will climb fomard onto an adult chair, turn around and sit &win,

within 1 minute of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days. :

0

27. Seats Self in Small Chair (Activity) .

Child will seat self in a small,chair within 30 seconds of presentation of.

chair for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 cOnsecutive days.

Skills - Throwing/Kicking

28. Throws Ball Overhand Landing,Within Three Feet of Target (Activity)

The child, in standing position, throws aJball overhand a distance of 3 feet,

vi.thin2Osecondsofverbalcuefor80%ofthetrialson2outoficorisecutive.days. (The ball should land within 3 feet of the target.)

29. Child Will Catch Large Ball (ActivitA .

The child in standing position will catch a 12" ball when'the ball is throWrr

to him for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 tonsecmtive days.

4

30. Child Catches Ei.ht Inch Ball (Activit )

The c 1 in stan.ing position wi catch an 8 inch ball when the ball is ,

thrown to him for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

32. Child Will Kick Ball Forward ActiVit )T e c ild in standing position will independently kick a ball with one foot

within 20 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecu-

tive days. . .

33. Throws Ball Underhand in Sitting (Activity)TlieEhicithrow the ball underhand a distance of 3 feet within.20 secondsof verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

34. Throws Bali Into A Box (Activity)

The child in standing position will throw a bali.into a box which is 1 foot

away within 20 seconds of verbal cue or 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3,

Ionsecutive days.

3 t3

Page 125: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'GROSS MOTOR - ADVANCED ACTIVITIES - cont'd

31. Walks Into Large Ball While Trying to Kick It (Activity)

. The child, unable as yet to kick a ball, will walk toward the ball and move

it forward 1 foot by bumping-her/his. leg or*body into it when given the

verbal cue "Kick the ball", for 80% of the-trials on 2 out of 3 consecutie

days.

VII. Balance Skills

35. Walks With Assistance On Eight'Inth Board (Activity)

The child will walk at least three feet on ai 8" wide balance board with

someone holding her/his hand.within 30 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. (The board is raised 1-2" off floor)

36. Walks Independently on Eight Inch Balance Board (Activity)

Child will walk independently 6 feet on an 8 inch balance board within 1

minute of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

(The board is 8 inches wide, 6 feet long and one to two inches off the floor.

The child will walk the entire length without assistance.)

37. Walks Between Parallel Lines Eight Inches Apart (Activity).

Child will walk between parallel lines eight inches apart for a distance of

6 feet-within 30 seconds of verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

38. Stands on One Foot With Help (Activity).

The child is able to lift up one foot and balance on the other when 'supported

for 10 seconds for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

39. Child Will Imitate One FOot Standing (Activity).

Child will imitate one foot standing .1-or 1-2 seconds within.30 seconds of

verbal cue for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

40. Tries to Stand On Two Inch Balance Beam (Activity)

Thechild will independently stand on a 2 inch balance beam for 10 seconds

balancing only on 1 foot within 30 seconds for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

Page 126: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SELF-HELP,

A. Feeding

Objectives:.

1. Takes Food Off SpoonWhen mashed table food on a spoon is placed 1" from thild's mouth, child will

bring head forward and remove food from spoon by closing lips around spoon,

within 20 seconds of presentation of spoon, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

2. Bites Food (Activity) ..

Child will take one bite off a cracker/cookie held by an adult, within 20

,seconds of presentation of cracker/cookie, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

3. Finger-Feeds Self.

Child will pick up a piece of food, place it in his/her mouth, chew and

swallow the food, within l'minute.of presentation of food, for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive trials.

4. Chews Food With Munching Patterns (Activity)

Child will make 5 chewing movements jaw moves up and down) within 1 minute

of presentation of food in child's mouth, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

5. Scoops food, feeds self with spoon

A. When a spoon with food is placed in child's hand child will bring spoon .

to his/her mouth, take the food off the spoon within 2 minutes of presen-

tation of spoon, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutqe days.

B. When spoon is placed in tray/bowl, child will pick up spoon, scoop food

from bowl, and feed him/herself 1 spoonful of food within 2 minutes of

presentation of spoon, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days. J

.

.

6. Uses Fork (Activity)Child will use a fork to,pierce or scoop a piece of food and bring to

his/her mouth within 2 minutes of presentation of food, for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days..

B. Drinking

Obji,ctives:

1. CoordinateS,Sucking,'3wallowing and Breathing (Activitx)

Child will suck and swallow 1 mouthful of milk from a bottle or the breast

within 20 seconds of presentation of bottle or breast, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Holds and Drinks from Own Bottle.

Child will independently hold his/her bottle and drink at least 1 of ligutd

in the bottle without qropping bottle for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

3. Drinks From Cup Held For Him -aild will take one mouthful of drink from a cup held by an adult, within

20 seconds of cup being brought to child's mouth, for 80% of the trials, on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

t

Page 127: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

$ELF-HELP

Drinking - cont'd

4. Holds and'Drinks From CuE_Child will hold a cup using one hand and take a cupful of drink from the

:cup within 1 minute of presentation of cup, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

5. Holds Cup Handle (Activity)Child will grasp a handle or handles of a cup and maintain his/her grasp for

At least 1 minute within 20 seconds of presentatir of cup, for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. Pours li uid from small container (Activit 1

Child-will pour i cup of liquid from small container, within 1 minute of

being given the container, for 80% of the trfals on 2 OUt of 3 consecutive days.

!C, Dressing

Objectives:

1. Cooperates with Dreising and UndiTssing

A. Within 1 minute of verbal cue, child will extend:

i) arMs

ii) legsinto sleeves/pant legs, when adult locates hole in sleeves/pant legs for

child, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

B. Within 1 minute of verbal cue6 child will pull:

i) armsii) legs

out of sleeves/pant legs, when aduli holds sleeves/pant legs for child,

for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Removes Sock.Within 5 minutes of verbal cue, child will remOve both,socks independently;

far 80%.of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days:.

3. Removes Hat;. Places Hat on Head (Activity)

VITTETF 1 minute of verbal cue, child will:

A) remove a hat from his/her head independently,

13)- p1aCe a hat on his/her head independently, ifor 80%;6f the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive ddys.

4. Removes Shoes When'Laces Are UndoneWithin 5 minutes of verbal cue, child %till remove both of his/her shoes when

'the laces are undone; for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Removes A) coat/shirt; B) pullover shirti adult assists with fasteners.

A) Wien given a coat/shirt that is unfastened, child will take it off

independently, within 5 minute% of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

B) When uiven a pullover shirt that is unfastened, child will take it off

independently, within 5 minutes of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials,:

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 128: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

5ELF-HELP

Dressing - continued

ç.Unzips, zips large zippers (Activity)

Within one minute of verbal cue, child will (a) zip (b) Unzip a large zipper

at least 6 inches independently,"for 80%*of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive-days.

7. Pull ants off; adult assistance with.fasteners

,When child's pants are unfastened, child;will independently take them Off,

within 5 minutes of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

8. Puts Shoes and Socks On

A) When given 2 untied shoes and adult assistance in placing shoe on correct

foot, child will put left shoe on left foot and right shoe on right foot

independently, within 5 minutes of verbal Cue, for 80% of the trials, on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

B) When given a paie off socks, child will put a sock on each foot independently

%within 5 mindtes of4erbal cue; for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3,

consecutive days.

9. Pulls Pants Up *When given a pair of pants, child will put them on independently, within 5

minutes of verbal cue, and adult will fasten the pants; for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

10. Puts a coat/shirt- b ullover shirt on.

When given a a coat/shirt, b a pullover shirt, child will put on garmet

independently, within 5 minutes of verbal cue, and adult will fasten the

garment; for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

11. Unbuttons; Buttons Large Buttons (Activity)

A) ''!ithin 10 minutes of verbal cue, child will unbutton a shirt/coat that haslarge buttons and take the garmet off independently, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

B) Within 10 minutes of verbal cue, child will put a shirt/coat on and button

the large buttons independently, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of-3

consecutive days.

D. (rooming

Objectives:

1. Washes HandsWithin 5 minutes of being asked to wash hands, child will:

a) turn faucet on;b) wet hands;c) soap hands;

d) rub hands together;

e) rinse hands, and0 turn faucet off;for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Brushes Hair; Combs HairChild will hold brush/comb and make at least 3 brushing/combing actions on hair,

within 5 minutes of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

Page 129: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SELF-HELP

Grooming - cont'd

3. Brushes TeethChild will bring toothbrush to mouth, and make at least 3 brushing motions

on his/her teeth, within'5 minutes Of yerbal cue, for'80% ofthe trials,

on 2' out of 3'consecutive days.

4. Wioes/BlOwi Nose' (ActiyitY)WET-given a facial tissue, Child will wipe/blow his/her qwn nose, within

20 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of a'consecutive

days.

5. rie Napkin (ActivitY)hen given a napkini thild will use ii to wipe his/her mouth or hands, with-

in 20 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 ,consecutive

days.

6. Dries'HandsWhen given a paper towel/wash cloth, child will dry his/her hands, then

dispose of paper tool independently, Within 5 minutes of verbal cue, for

80% of the trials, on 2 out of'3 consecutive days.

E. Toileting

1. Sits on Potty Chair or on Adaptive Seat on Toilet With Assistance (Ahiv..ity)

Child will remain seated on-a potty chair or on an adaptive seat on toilet

for 3 minutes, when placed on the pOtty by an adult, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. May be toilet regulated by adult (Activtty)

When placed on the potty at regUiar time intervals, child will eliminate

in the'potty within 5 minutes of being placed on the potty, for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Anticipates Need to Eliminate on Time - May Use the Same Word for:Both

'F'unctions.(Activity)Child will indicate his/her need.to eliminate verbally or V gesture, in

time to use the toilet; and when taken to the toilet, will eliminate in

the toilet within 5 minutes of placement on the toilet, for 80% oi the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Takes Responsibility for Toileting Re uires Assistance in Wi in .(Activity).

Child will (a) indicate is/her need to eliminate verbally or by gesture;

(b) go to the bathroom independently; (c) take his/her pants and/or underpants

off; (d) and eliminate in the toilet within 5 minutes of placementon the

toilet, with at least 80% success during the day, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

Page 130: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

-

I. AUDITORY RESPONSE.9

Objective:

1. Childtt'behavior.Changes'in reSponSe to soundl(AttiVity).Child will change activity level within 20 seconds of sound presentation,for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Quiets to familiar voice..(Activity).. Child will decrease activity level within 20 seconds of hearing a familiar

voice, far 80% of the trials, oh 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Turns head and looks to source of sound.When sound ispresented to side, 900 from midline, within 12" from ear,.child will turn head and look for sound source wifhin 20 seconds of,sound presentation, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutivedays

II. RECEPTIVE LANGUAGE

Objective:.

1. Responds to own name (Activity).aild will turn toward speaker or change activYty level within 20 secondsof hearing own name c'alled, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 cohsecutive

days

2. Uses gestures to respond to simple requests.Child will respond with correct gesture within 20 seconds of a simplerequest, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days, for at

least 5 requests.

3. Stops activity on command "No". (Activity).

Child will stop activity for at least 5 seconds within 10 seconds ofhearing the command "No' , for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days. '

4. Follows directions.Ctlild will respond correctly to a one-component direction, within 20seconds of direction being given, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of3 consecutive days, for at least 5 directions.

III. EXPRESSIVE LANGUAGE.

Objective:

1. Mimi fiew "sounds.(Activit9)571Td5Fill make 1 new sound for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3consecutive days, forat least 5 new sounds.

2. Laughs. (Activity)Child will chuckle or laugh in response to a pleasurable stimuli,,within 20 seconds of stimuli presentation, for 80% of thetrials on2 out of 3.consecutive days.

142

Page 131: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

III. EXPRESSIVE LANGAUGE: Objectives (continued)

3. Responds to sound stimulation or speech by vocaliting (Activity).

Child will_vocaTize within 20 seconds of presentation of sound or

speech, for .90%,of the trials, On 2 out of $ consecutive days.

4. LoOand vOdalizes to his/her*name.(Attivity):

Child will establish eye contact with speaker and vocalize within

30 seconds of hearing his/her name called, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 cons&utive days.

5. Makes sounds for,certaih'Oblects.Child will consistently use one sound to identify or'reguest for one

pa cular object or person within 20 seconds of object/person

presentation, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days

for a total of at least 3 objects/persons.

6. Appareqt r6cognition of "own" sounds by vdcaliting similar sounds.

(Uzgiris and Hunt,.1975, cited in,Branston, Eng, Hunt & Vincent, 1978)

tt

Objective:

A. Child imitates activity by'making a sound.

Child will make a similar sound within 20 seconds of hearing adult

imitate a sound he/she (chlid) just made for 80% of the trials, on

2 oUt of 3 consecutive days. -

B. Adult intfiates the activit b'thaking a tbund in child's re ertoire.

Child will make a similar sound within 20 seconds Qf hearing adult

make a sound from child's repertoire, for 80% of the trials,-on

2 out of 3 consecutive days. ,

. .

7. Matches familiarsbunds when stimulus changes (Activity).

(Uzgiris and Hunt, 1975, cited in Branston, Eng, Hunt &,Vincent, 1978)

Child will yepeat a similar sound in response to adult making a sound

from the child's repertoire, and change his/her sounds within 20 seconds

of adult changing the stimulus sound, for 80% of the trials on 2 'out of 3

consecutive days.

8. Imitates novel sounds directly.Ipi41-FiriFiaTag-Ti975, cited in Branston, Eng, Hunt & Vincent, 1978).

Child will imi*te a new sound (not in child's repertoire) within 20

seconds of adult modeling the sound, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3'consecutive days, for a total of 5 new sounds. ,

9. Combines gestures and vocalizations (Activity).

Child will combine his/her vocalizations with appropriate gestures

with44 20 seonds of presentation of desired object or Verbal cue, for

80% of the trials, on 2 vt of 3 consecutive days.

10. Repeats most-simple new words.(Uzgiris and Hunt, 1975, cited in Branston, Eng, Hunt & Vincent, 1978)

Child will repeat one new word within 20 seconds of adult modeling the

word, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days,'for at

least 5 new words.

143

Page 132: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

III: EXPRESSIVE LANGUAgf Objectives (continued)

Says One - Three Words (AttivitY).

C i d will say-1 Word spontaneouslymithin 20 seconds of presentation

of an activity/object/person, on 2 out.of 3 consecutive days, for a

total of 3 words.

12.. NaMes'one familiar objett..Child will label 1 familiar object within 20 seconds of object presen-

1tation or verbal cue, for 80% of the trials,*on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days,.for at least 5 familiar objects.

13. Names picture of object.Child will label one picture of a familiar object within 20 seconds

of picture presentation or verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days, for at least 5 pictures of different oblbcts.

1 . Uses own name to'refer to self (ActiVity).

.Chtld will respond correctly with first name within 20 seconds of verbal

cue,"What 'is your name?" for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

35. Says two - three word phfase.

, Child will use 1 two-three word phrase, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days,

for at least To phrases.

16. Uses pronoua (Activity).Child will use I pronoun, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days, for at least

3 pronouns.

17. Uses Past tense (Activity).Child will use 1 past tense verb, on 2 out,of 3 consecutive days for at

least'5 past tense verbs.

questionsansweronequeition-using a verbal or gestural response within

20 seconds of question being asked, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days, for at 1east-10 simple questions (e.g., "When",

"Where", "What"). e

19. Uses size words (Activity).Chilqwwill use a size word spontaneously, at least 3 times a day, for

2 outt-of 3 consecutive days.

20. Uses Plurals.thi1d will use one plural correctly within 20 seconds of presentation

.'of objects/pictures, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of'3 conecutive

days, for at least 5 different sets of objects[pictures.

21. Uses one preposition.Child will use'a preposition correctly within 20 seconds of presentation

of _objects and'verbal cue, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days, for at least 3 different prepositions.

Page 133: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

III. EXPRESSIVE L GUAGE: Objectives (continued)

22. Asks questioils beginning with "What", "Where", "When" (ActiVity).Child will ask at least 3 questions beginning with "What", "Wherea,"When"; Spontaneously.

Page 134: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I. VISUAL RESPONSE TO STIMULUS

Objective:

1. Child will'respond with one or more of the to:flowing:

a. glancing or looking at object

b. eye blinkc. cessation of activity

within 10 seconds of presentation of visual stimuli for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Visually Follows; 900 .angle.

Child will.viSually follow an object continuously,from midline to side4

and/or side to midline within 20 seconds of:objectpresentation for 80%

of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3, y_isuallFollove.rh-i-TCiwiTEis-u-all-y-f-611-6-w-in object

continuously from side to side,

1800, within 20 seconds of object presentation for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecOtive days.

4. Aitually follows; random motion.

Child will visually follow a continuously moving object which is moved

through a sequence of 3 different directionsrandomly, within 20 seconds

of object presentation for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

II. OBJECT PERMANENCE - ACTIVITIES

Objective:

1. Finds a partially hidden object (Activity).

Child will uncover or pick up a partially coverednon-symmetrical object

within 20 seconds of object being covered for 80% of the trials on 2

out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Removes transparent obstacle (Activity)

Child will remove a transparent obstacle and obtain an object which is

within reach, within 20 seconds of obstacle being placed in front of

object for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Antici ates visually the trajectory of a slowly moving object (Activity)

d wi swat' is er g ance.. rom t e point o isappearance o an

object to the expected point of reappearance within 5 seconds of dis-

:appearance of Object for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4: Finds Hidden Object Under *a'Screen (Activity)

Child will find an objecthe/she sees hidden under one of three screens

within 20 seconds of object being hidden for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

5.* Follows trajectory of fast moving object (Activit )

- Child will vis'ually follow a rapid y moving or f&lling object after it

passes behind an obstacle for BO% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

Page 135: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

6. Finds hidden object under three superimposed screens.(Activity)

Child.will find an object he/she sees hidden under three layers of

screens placed one'at a tiMe On the Objedt, Within 20 seconds ofobject being hidden for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

7. Hidden Displacement (ACtivity)Child will find an object, when hidden by a seMes of displacements(hidden displacement), for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

dan.

8. Functional Permanency (Activity).Child will search for an object where it was last ieen (at least 10 minutes

ago), or where it is usually kept, within 20 seconds of verbal cue for

80% of the trial& on 2 ott of 3 consecutive days.

III. MEANS-END/CAUSALITY

1-Objective:

1. Overcomes obstacle to obtain ob'ect ActivitChild will obtain an object by reaching over or around an obstacle

or by removing the barrier within 20 seconds of presentation of obstacle/barrier for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Retrieves object using other material (Activity).

Thi-ld will pull the material 'on which an object rests to obtain the

object, within 20 seconds of object presentation for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Moves to obtain object that is out of reach (Activit ).

Child wi I move self to o tain an object that is out of reach (less than

5 feet away), but still visible, within 30 seconds of object being moved

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Pulls string horizontally to obtain object (Activity).

Child will move self to obtain an object that is out of reach (less than

5 feet away), but still visible, within 30 seconds of object being

moved for 80% of.the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Pulls string vertically to obtain object (Activity).Thild will pull upward on a string to obtain an object attached to the

string, within 20 seconds of object being lowered'beneath a/barrier

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. Uses tool to obtain desired object (Activity)

Child, will use an unrelated object to obtain a aesired object, within

30 seconds presentation of desired object for 80% of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 136: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

7. Activation of toy (Activity). .

A. Child will hand toy to adult to reactivate; within 20 seconds oftoy ceasing its action.for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 con-secutive days.

B. Child will look for and succeed in activating a toy'(althotigh he/shedid not see toy activated) within 1 Minute of toy presentation for80% of the trials on 2 out of 3.consecutive days.

IV. MOTOR IMITATION

Objective:

1. Imitates familiar gesture.Child will make the same gesture within 20 seconds'of adult modelinga gesture from child's repertoire, for at east 5 familiar gestures,for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consec tive "dlays.

2. Imitaies'a novel body movement that öhils can §ee hit/herself'perfOrm.Child will repeat modeled body action, thin 20 seconds of adUltmodeling a body movemedt, not in chili s repertoire, for at least 5novel body movements for 80% of th rials on 2"-out of 3 consecutivedays

3. Imitates "invisible" (facial) gestures.Child will make the qame facial gesture within 20 seconds 9f adultmodeling the facial gesture, for at least 5 facial gestures for 80%of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Imitates 2-action combinations,Child will repeat a 2-action combination within 20 s'econds of adultmodeling the actions, for at least five 2-action coMbinationsjor 80%of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Deferred imitation (Actiliity).

Child will repeat an action that was geen at least 10 minutes priorto the time the child performs the action for 80% of the trials op2 out.of 3 consecutive days.

V. SPATIAL RELATIONSHIPS

Objective:

1. Looks from ilne object to another (Activity).Child will look 6riefly at one object then another object when bothare held within his visual field, within 20 seconds of presdhtation

' of object for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive d4s.

2. Turns Object to "right side" (Activitx)Child grasps object, which has a definite front and backeor top andbottom, and turns it to the "right side", within 20 seconds of objectpresentation for 80% of the trials on.2 out of 3 consecutive days'.

3. Simple detour (Activity).Child will go around obstacles to obtain a desired object, within1 minute of losing desired object for 80% of the trials-on 2 out of3 consecutive days,

Page 137: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

FINE MOTOR - Reach & Grasp

Objectives:

1.. Moves Arm Symmetrigally (Activity)child will move his/hercarms together with.random movements to the 5ide;

at least 2 times/within 20 seconds of object being prAsented in child's

visual field, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days. ,...

2. Brings'Aands to Midline in Supine PositionChild Will independently bri-iig (a) left, (b) right hand to a midline positfon

and hold this position for 3 seconds, within 20 seconds of foy presentatiOn,"

while lying on her/his back, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive '

days.

3. Opens Hand, Indwelking Thumb No Longer Present (Activity)

Child will keep his/her hand open for at least 5 seconds with thumb no

longer held in his/her hand, within 20 seconds of phYsical proippt*, for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.'

4. Grasps Toy ActivelyChild will maintain his/her grasp on object using (a) left hand (b) right

hand, for at least 30 seconds, within ,20 seconds of object being placed in

child's hand; for 80% of the trials on 2 out Pf 3 consecutive days..

5. m_lcIToy_lp_aReachesTovithoutGrasin

Child will reach and touch object preSented at arm's length, at midline,

within 20 seconds of object presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

6. Clasps HandsChild will independently grasp her/his own hands at midline or play with

her/his fingers for at least 5 seconds, within 20 seconds of tap at elbows

or verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

.7. Keeps Hands Open.80% of the Time (Activity)

Child will keep his/her hands open and not fisted at least 80% of 10 one-

minute trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

8. Uses Palmer Gra'sp (Activity)

Child will gyesp an object against the palm without use of the thumb,

within 20 seconds of object presentation, for 80% of the trials 6n 2 out

of,3 consecutive days.

9. Reaches for Object Bilaterally, i.e., witivlboth arms

Child Oil] reach with both arms and grasp an object presented at arm's length,

at midline, within 20 secondspf object presentation, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 cdosecutive days.

10. Uses Radial Palmar Grasp (Activity) .

Child will grasp an object with her/his thumb, index and middle fingers

against her/his palm, within.20 seconds of object presentation, for*ta

of the trials, on 2 out of a consecutive days.

Page 138: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

FINE MOTOR - Reach. & Grasp (continued)

11. Holds Arm Out When Antic.' atin !kin Picked U

C i d wil ift arms up at east inc es to indicatia-that s/he wants to

be picked up, within 20 seconds of verbal cue, for/80% of the trails on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

12. Reaches for Ob'ect Unilaterall i.e. using ne arm-

Chi d will reac for object wit a left arm. I right arm and.grasp, an

object presented.at arm's length,. within 20 seconds of objeCt presentation,

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of,3 consgtutive days.

13. Approaches Second Object While Still Holding_ First ,(Activity.1

Child will reach for second object.while holding first object, within

20 seconds of presentation of second object, for 80% of the trialsr on

2 out 6f 3 consecutive days.

14. Attempts to Secure Tiny Object (Activity)

Child will attempt to grasp a pellet-sized-object from table/floor, within

20 seconds of objeCt presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

15. Reaches and GratpObjectt crossing midline

Child will reach across midline with (a) left hand (b) right hand, and

,grasp object presented 450 from mi.dline to the side, within 20seconds

of object presentation, for 80% of the trials on Z out of 3 consecutive '

16. Rakes Tiny ObjectChild will pick up a tiny object using a raking motion within 20 seconds

.of object presentation, for 80% of the trial-s on'2 out of 3 consecuticte

glays.

17. Uses Radial Digital Grasp (Activity) ,

Child will grasp an object with the thumb, index and middfd finger with=

out the usd of the palm, within 20 seconds of object presentation, for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

18. Uses Inferior Pincher Grasp (Activity)

Child will grasp a small object with her/his index finger and thumb (thumb

is positioned at the lateral or lower part of the index finger), withi6,20

secOndS of object presentation, for 80% of the trials, on.2 out,of 3

consecutive days.

19. Uses Neat Pincer GrasEChild will independently pick up one tiny object using a pincer grasp

within 20 seconds of Object presentation for 80% of the teials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days..

-4

15t)

Page 139: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

FINE MOTOR - Object Manipulation

Objective:

1. Begins Play with Rattle/Toy:

Child will shake or appropriately manipulate toy at least 3 times within

20 seconds of being given the toy for, 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

2. Holds an Ob'ect and Brin s It to Mouth,.

Child will hold an object and bring it to mouth, within 20 seconds of object

presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Use Hands and Mouth for Sensor Exploration of Ob. cts Activit

Child will manipulate an object using at least 2 d fferent actions within

5 minutes ofobject presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

4. Regards Tiny Object (ActiVity)

T e c 1, oo s at an o ject,t e size of a pellet raisin for 1 second withim

20 seconds ofobject presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

5. Looks at Distant Object (Activity)

Child will look at an object that is at least 5 feet from child, for at

least 1 second, within 20 seconds of verbal cue or object presentation,

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. Picks Up Dropped Object

Child will pick up an object that is anywhere within reach using (a) left

c hand; (b) right hand, within 20 seconds of object being presented or dropped,

fOr 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

7. Retains Small Object in Each Hand

Child will hold a small object in each hand simultaneously for at least

10 seconds, within 20seconds of toy presentation, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

8. Transfers ObjectChild will grasp an object with one hand then transfer the object to the

other hand, within 20 seconds of the cnd object being offered, for 80% of

the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

9. Bangs Object on Table (Activity)

Child will bang/hit an object on a table or any hard surface at least

3 times within 20 seconds of object presentation, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

10. Mani ulates To Activel with Wrist Movements Activit

The child grasps, explores and manipu ates a toy using at least 3 active

rotary wrist movements, within 20 seconds of object presentation, for

80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 140: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

0%.

Fine Motor - Object Manipulation (continued)

11. Elarisl'ojithertP-Ta will bang/hit 2 objects together at least 3 times within 20 seconds of

having the 2 objects in her/his hands, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

12. Removes Pegs From Pe9board

Child will take 5 small'pegs out of a pegboard independently within one

minute of presentation of pegs, for 80% of the trials on'2 out of 3

consecutive days,

13. Extends Wrist (Activity)

Child will extend her/his wrist whilemanipulating objects within one minute'

of object presentation, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

14. Takes Objects Out of Container (Activity)

Child empties or removes at least 3 objects from a container by dumping it

over or by taking out the objects one by one, within one minute of container

presentation, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

15. Pokes with Index Finger (Activity)

Child will isolate her/his index finger to poke or feel an object within

20 seconds of Verbal cue or object presentation, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

16. Puts Object into Container

Child will place at least one small object into a small container, within

20 seconds of verbal cue or presentation of objects, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

17. Stack RingsA) Child will remove 6 rings from a ring stack, within one minute of verbal

cue or presentation of rings, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

B) Child will place 6 rings on a ring stack in any order, within one minute

of verbal cue Or presentation of rings, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

18. Places at Least 6 Round Pegs in Pegboard.

Child will place at least 6 round pegs in a pegboard, within one minute

of verbal cue or presentation of pegs, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

19. Places Circle, Square, Triangle Shapes into Form Board

When presented with a form board with a circular hole, a square hole, and

a triangular hole, child will independently place the 3 shapes (circle,

square, triangle) into the appropriate holes, within one minute of presentation

of the shapes, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

20. Builds Tower Using 8 Cubes

Child will build a tower of 8 cubes, placing one cube over another, within

2 minutes of verbal cue, or presentation of blocks, for 80% bf the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 141: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Fine Motor - Object Manipulation (continued)

21. Strings 3 One-inch Bead (ctivity)Child will string at least 3 one-inch beads with a heavy corded string, within

5 minutes of presentation of beads, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

consecutive days,

22. Puts Tiny Object into Small Container

Child will place at least one tiny object into a small container, within

20 seconds of verbal cue or presentation offobjects, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

23. Snips with Scissors (Activity)

Child will make at least 3 discreet snips with the scissors, within one

minikte of verbal cue and presentation of materials, for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

24. Imitates Adult drawing lines, circles, crosses

Child will imitate the following strokes within 20 seconds of adult modeling

the stroke; for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

25. Places 6 Square Pegs in Pegboard.

Child will place 6 square pegs in a pegboard, within 2 minutes of verbal

cue or presentation of pegs, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

26. Completes (A) Non-interlocking puzzle (B) Interlocking Puzzle.

(A) Child will independently complete a five piece non-inter)ocking puzzle;

for 80% of the trials, on 2.out of 3 consecutive days%

(B) Child will complete 3-4 piece interlocking puzzle, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

27.'Stacks Rings in Correct Order (Activity.1

Child will independently stack at least 6 rings in the correct order,

within 5 minutes of presentation of ring stack, for 80% of the trials,

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days

28. Imitates Three Block Bridge usin9 cubes (Activity)

Child will build a bridge using three cubes (one-inch) within one minute

of adult modelling the bridge for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 con-

secutive days.

15j

Page 142: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pre-Academics

I. DISCRIMINATION

A. Matching.

Objectives:

1. Matches ObjectsWhen presented Viith a choice of 3 different objects (target object, 2 dis,

tractor objects) child will correctly point to or touch the object that

matches the target object, within 20 Seconds of verbal cue, "Find the one

that's the same", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2. Matches Sounds to Animals (Activity)

A. Child.will vocalize correct sound, within 20 seconds of question,

"What does the (animal) say?", for 80% of the trials, on 2,out of

3 consecutive days; for.at least 5 animals.

B. Child will point to correct animal (for a choice of 3) within 20

seconds of question, "What goes (animal sound)?", for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for af least 5 animals.

3. Matches Objects to PicturesWhen presented with a choice of : a) 3 different objects (1 target object,

2 distractor objects), child will correctly point to or touch the object4

that matches the target picture, within 20 seconds of the verbal cue,

"Find the one that's the same", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

When presented with a choice of : b) 3 pictures of different objects

(1 target picture, 2 distractor pictures), child will correctly point

to or touth the picture that matches the target object, within 20

seconds of the verbal cue,."Find the one that's the same", for 80% of

the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

4. Matches Sounds to Pictures of Animals (Activity) .

A. Child will vocalize correct sound, within 20'seconds of question

"What does the (animal) say?", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3 consecutive days; for at least 5 animal'picture.

B. Child will point to correct animal picture (from a choice of 3),

within 20 seconds of question "What goes (animal sound)?", for

80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consectuive days; for at least

5 animals.

5. Matches Shapes - Circle_,_ Triangle, Square (Toys) .

When presented with a circular shape, a triangular shape and a'square

shape, child will correctly point to or touch the shape that matches

the target shape, within 10 seconds of the verbal cue, "Find the one

that's the same," for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

15 i

Page 143: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pre-Academics

I. DISCRIMINATION

A. Matching - continued

6. Sorts ObjectsChild will sort at least 20 objects into 4 groups, each group/set

containing at least 5 identical objects, within 5 minutes of verbal

cue, "Sort the ", for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

7. Matches Identical Simple Pictures of Objects

When presented with a.choice of 3 pictures of different objects (target

picture, 2 distractorpictures), child viil correctly point to or touch

the picture that matches the target picture, within 20 seconds of verbal

cue, "Find the one that's the same, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of

3 consecUtive days.

8. Sorts PicturesChild will sort at least 20 pictures into 4 groups, each group/set

containing at lea4st5 identical pictures, within 5 minutes of verbal

cue, "Sort the ", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecOtive

days.

9 Matches Prfmary Colors, and Black ahd'White

When presented with 3 colors, child will correctly point to or touch the

color that matches the target color, within 20 seconds of the Verbal

cue, "Find the one that's the same", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out

of 3 consecutive'days.

10. Matches Similar Pictures of Objects

When presented with at least 20 pictures (4 object sets, with 5 similar

pictures of the same object in each set); child will sort the pictures

into 4 sets of pictures of the same object, within 10 minutes of the

verbal cue, "Find all the pictures of ", for 80% of the trials, on

2 out of 3 consecutive days-.

11. Sorts Shapes - Circle, Triangle, Squarewill sort at least T5 shapes into 3 sets, each set containing

at least 5 similar (but not identical) shapes, within 5 minutes of

verbal cue, "Sort the ", for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3

consecutive days.

12. Matches Pictures of Shapes .

When presented with a choice of 3 pictures of different shapes (1 target

shape, 2 distractor shapes), child will correctly point to or touch

the shape that matches the target shape, withtn 20 seconds of verbal cue,

"Find the one that's the same", for 80% of the trials., on 2 out of

3 consecutive days.

13. Sorts Colors1471-i&t at least 20 objects into 4 sets, each set containing at least

5 objects identical except for color within 5 minutes of verbal cue,

"Sort the ", for a total of 6 different colors, for 80% of the

trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

Page 144: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

t

r: DISCRIMINATION

, B. piscrimination

Objectives:, ,

1. . Looks for Family 'I'llembers or Pets When Named; Recognizes Several People in

Addition to Immediate Family.Child will .identify named person by looking toward or pointing to the

person within 20 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% pf the trials, on 2 out of

3 cohsecutive days; for at least 3 family members and 2 people in addition

to immediate family. . .

2. Discriminates Objects.

/When presented with a choice of 3 objects (a target obj ct and 2 distractor

objects),-child will correctly point to or touch the t get object within

-20 seconds of the verbal cue, PFind the ,",for 80% of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive days, for a total of 10 objects.

3. Indicates Two Objects From Group of Familiar Objects (PrAivity). ..,

-Child will point to, touch, or pick up two different objects at the4isame time

out of a group of three to five objects within'20 seconds of verbal cue, for

80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

1 4. Identifies Self. .

Child will identify self by pointing to self or mirror image,,within 20

seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 Consecutive days.

5. Idehtifies at Least 6 Body PartsChild will identify 1 body part on self/doll by pointing or touching the part

named, within 20 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3

,

consecutive days; for a total of 6 body parts.

6. Brings Objects from Another Room on Request (Activity),

Child will bring an object from another room within 1 minute pf verbal cue,

for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for a total of 5 objects.

7. Recognizes and Points to,Animal Pictures.'. .

When presented with a choice of 3 animal pictures (1 target picture, 2 distractor,

pictures), child will correctly point to or touch the target pictures within

20 seconds of verbal cue, "Find the (target animal)", for 80% of the trials bn

2 out of 3 consecutive *days. ,

'

.

8. Points to Distant Objects Outdoors.(Activit,0.

Child will point in direction of named object, within 20 seconds of,verbal cue,

for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for at least 5 objects.

9. Points to Several Clothing Items on. Request.When presented with a choice of 3 pieces of clothing (1 target, and 3 dq.-

tractors), child will correctly point to or touch the target clothing within

20 seconds of the verbal cue, "Find the (target clothing)", for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

156

Page 145: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I. DISCRIMINATION'BDiscrimination conttnued

10. Recognizes Self in P4tograph (Activity).

When presented with a choice of 2.photographs, child will point to or pick

her/his-own photograph within 20 seconds of verbal cue, "Find (target object)",

for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

11.. Find Her/His Own Belongings From Others (Activity).

When presented with a choice of 3 sets of belongings (e.g., clothes, shoes),

child will corl-ectly pick.out her/his own withirr 20 seconds of verbal cue,

"rind yOur. (target object)," for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days.

12. Points to Pictures of Familiar Ob'ects and Peo.le i.e. Discriminates

Pictures of Objects and People.when presented with a choice of pictures of 3 different objects of people

.(a target picture and 3 distractor pictures), child will correctly point

'to,or touch the target picture within. 10 seconds of verbal cue, "Find the

(target object)", for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3.consecutive days.

13. Identifies Rooms in Own House (Activity).

Child will go to or point to a room in her/his house, within 1 minute of verbal cue

for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of 3 Consecutive days; for at least 3 different mon

14 Identifies Clothing_ilmisforsgifferent_Occasigas_(Activity).When presented with a choice of 3 clothing,items, child will pick out

appropriate clothing within 20 seconds of verbal cue: "What do you wear when

you ?", for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

15. Recognizes Familiar Adult in Photograph (Activity).

When presented with a choice of 3 photogr'aphs, child will point to correct

picture within 10.seconds of verbal.cue "Find (adult's name)", with 80%

accuracy, on 3 consecutive days.

16. Understanding of Prepositions.Within 20 seconds of the cue "Put/Take the object preposition the container/

furniture, the child will pick the object up and place it in the correct

position, for 80% of the trials, on 2 out of,3 consecutive days.

17. Selects Pictures Involving Action Words.

When presented with a choice of 3'action pictures, child.will point to

correct picture within 20 seconds of verbal cue, "Show me the girl/boy

", for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days, for at least

5 action pictures.

18. Knows Own Sex of Others_SActivity).

When presented with 2 choices, child will pick out the girl/boy within

20 seconds of verbal cue "Which one is a (girl/boy)?", for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

15'

Page 146: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I. DISCRIMINATIONB. Dischmipation - continued

19. Identifies Familiar Objects by Touch (Activity).

When presented with a choice of 3 objects fhat are covered, child will find

-the correct object by touchjng, within 20 seconds of verbal cue, "Find the

", for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for at least

5 objects.'

20. Discriminates Several Colors.

When presented with a choice of 3 pictures.of identical objects except for

color (1 target color, 2 distractors), child will correctly point to or

touch the picture of the target color, within 20 seconds of the verbal

cue, "Find the (target color)(object name)," for al of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive days;'for at least 5 colors. -

-21. Discriminates 3 Shapes.

When presented with 3, objects identical except for shape (1 target shape,

2 distractor shapes), child will coy'rectly point to or touch the target

..shape, within 20 seconds of verbal cue; for 80% of the trials on 2 out of

3 consecutive days; for a total of 3 shapes.

1

6

Page 147: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pre-Academics....

II. CLASSIFICATION

A. Function

. :#1 Demonstrates Use of Objects

42 Identifies Objects With Their Use

B. Attributes

#1 Understands Concept of One

#2 Gives. One Out,of Many

#3 Points to Larger or Smaller of 2 Objects

114Understands Concept of Two

,-

#5 Points to Longer of 2 ObjeCts

... -..#6 Points to Longer of 2 Lines ,

,.

-

_ -

,

15,)

%.

..

_

,

III

,

,

)

Page 148: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pre-Academics

II. CLASSIFICATION

. A. Function

'04'

Objectives:

Demonstrates Use of Obj.ects

Child will demonstrate.functional use of 1 object, using appropriate

gestures, within 20 seconds of verbal -cue, "What do you do with ?"

for 80% of the trials on. 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for at least

10 objects.

2. Identifies Obiests With Their Use.

5en presented with a choice of 3 objects, child will pick out correct

object, within 20 seconds of verbal cue "What do you (function)?" for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days; for at least 5 objects.

B. Attributes

1.UndersTands Concept of One.Child will point fo a set of one out of a choice of 3 sets, within

20 seconds of verbal cue, "Find one " for 80% of the trials

for 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

2 Gives One Out of Many (Activity)

When presented with at least 5 objects', child will pick out one

within 20 seconds of verbal cue, "Get one (object name)" for 80%

of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Points to Larger or Smaller of 2 Objects

When presented with 2 objects that are identical except for size,

child will point to the correct object within 20 seconds of Verbal

cue, "Find the Small (object name)" for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

4. Understands Concept of Two

Child will point to a set of 2 out of a choice of 3 sets, within 20

seconds of verbal cue, "Find 2 (object name)" for 80% of the trials

on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Points to Longer of Two Objects.(Activity)

When presented with 2 objects, child will point to the longer of the

objects, within 20 seconds of verbal cue "Find the longer (Object

name)" for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

6. Points to Longer of Two Lines (Activity)

When presented with 2 lines, child will point to the longer of the

lines,-within 20 seconds of verbal cue, "Find the longer line", for

80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 conseCutive days.

Page 149: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SOCIAL CURRICULUM (Activities and Objectives)

1. Ressonds To Another Person ActiVit )

1 a wi c ange s her e avlor by increasing activity, turning head,

or visually following people around him/her within 20 seconds of social

contact for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3.consecutive days.

2; Regards Face_(Activity)The child will momentarily look at the face of the person interacting with

him/her within 20 secondkof presentation of person's face for 80% orthe

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

3. Illaleslye Contact With An Adult

The thild will establisFiria-iiii-intain eye contact with an adult for 5 seconds

within 20 seconds of verbal cue, 1"['child's name'], look at me",for 80% of the

trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive Ciays.

4. Vocalizes in Response To Adult Talk and Smile (Activity)

.The-child will vocalize, coo, or make happy sounds within 20 seconds of"

presentation of adult smiling and vocalizing, for 80% of the trials on

2 out of 3 consecutive days.

5. Smiles At'Mirror Image (Activity)

The child will smile at image of self in mirror within 30 seconds of

presentation of mirror, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive

days

6: Responds To Own NameThe child will turn toward a person calling his/her name from a distance

of 5 feet within 10 seconds of verbal cue, for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

7. Repeats Social*Game Activity (Activity)

Teci wi 1 respon appropriateyfo an adult inagame pf peek-a-boo

or pat-a-cake and gesture for game activity to be repeated within 20 seconds

of cessation of game, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

8. Gives Toy On RequestThe chi)d will give toy to familiar adult withia 20 seconds of adult request,

for 80% of.the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

9. Child Plays Beside Or In Close Physical Proximity With Another Child (Activity)

he c 1 wi p ay esi e or in ess t an two feet from another child for at

least 10 minutes, for 80% of the trials on 2 out of 3 consecutive days.

10. Child Initiates Inde endent Pla Task But Re uired Adult Su ervision To Carry

ut Ideas ActjvityThe cbild will initiate task play (alone or with others) for at least 10

minutes, but may require adult.supervision for 80% of the trials on 2 out

of 3 consecutive days.

11. Partictpates In Circle Games (Activity)

The child will interact with other children in circle games such as "Ring

Around The Rosie", and "The Farmer In The Dell", for 80% of the trials the

task is introduced on 2 out of 3.consecutive days.

1 6

Page 150: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

0-

11

I.4

fcl

,

Appendix C,

,

Individualized Education Program Form

16,-,'

Page 151: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1.

3

San FrancisCo Infant Pro ram-

Indivtdualized Educational-Program

1. Name:.Age: B.D.:

A2. Medical Considerations and.Physital DescriptiLon

3. Mode of Communication:

4. Dehioral Characteristics:

5, Effective Reinforcers:

6. Interactions with Non-Handicapped Peers:

7 Servides:

ServicesInitiation Date Duration Personnel

Conference Attended By:

Parent

Parent

Other

Date TeacherDate

Date Therapist

Date

Date

Other-,..

Date

Page 152: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Long-Term Goal:

Short-Term ObjectiyesAnticipated

Instructional and/or . Date ofTeaching Strategies Completion

ASMFPWrOMMrnalrfr0a004Vela

Method ofMeasurement

RelatedAreas'of Concern

1(3i

Page 153: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.

,,

Appendix D

Parent Participation Formis

1) Program Development Sheet

2) Data Sheet

3) Parent Involvement Plan

e

,

Page 154: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

San Francisco Infant Program

Name: Date:

Objective:

Materials:

Procedure:

Page 155: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Additional Objectives:

Additional Suggestions:

Suggeste'd Ideas for Observation:

Any Questions?

1 G c.)

Page 156: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

APPENDIX IVgown's Syndrome Infanf-Parent Program* -

TARGET SKILL:

Appendix/221

Week 1 Week 2

Date/ / / / / / / / / / / /10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

8 8 8. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NOTES:

Week 3 Week 4

Date /10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 . 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

NOTES:

Adapted from Saunders, R. R. 1. Koplik, K. A multi-purposedata sheet for recording and graphing in the classroom. AAESPHRevive. 1975, 1, 1-8

This data sheet appears .inHanson, M. J. Teaching your Down'sSyndrome infant: A guide for parents.

Baltimore, Maryland: Uni4ersity Park

Press, 1978. -

Page 157: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1

1

4,

PUPILIIAME

SCHOOL

il

k1Lli!..iNU EARLY CNIINIUM EDUCAlIWI Pk0f;RAM (REIMPARENT INVOLVEMENT PLAN (PIP)

PARENT/GUARD1AN

ADDRESS

PHONE

SPECIAL EDUCATION PROGRAM 0

0,

PIP MEETINGPIP BEGINS ONREVIEW ,

DAUS

3YEAR ASSESSMENT BY:

AREAS OF NEED: PARENT SIGNATURE, .

TEACHER SIGNATUREEDUCATIONALI.

SERVICES:POSITIONING

2. CARRYING3. MOTOR S'XILtS:

c

4. HAND USE/MANIPULATION5. LANGUAGE EXPRESSIVE6. LANGUAGE RECEPTIVE

7. SENSORIOTOR /

8. FEED1NG/PRE-SPEECH9. BATHING

10. DRESSINGII. TOILETING12. HANDWASHING13. PLAY

14. BEHAVIOR MANAGEMENT15. SPECIFIC STRATEGIES FOR TEACHING

(SPECIFY CURRICULUM AREAS)1.

2.

3.

4.

REFERRALS FOR RELATED SERVICES:I. SOCIAL SERVICES ASSISTANCE2. RESPITE OR CHILD CARE3. TRANSPORTATION4. MEDICAL OR DENTAL5. FAMILY COUNSELING

LIST OF ANNUAL GOALS FOR PARENT PARTICIPATION

CAN BE FOUND ON PAGE 2

Page 158: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

..;

A,

DATE: .

..

PARENT/STAFF:

STUDENT:

LEARNING AREA:

ACTIVITY:

INSTRUCTOR/RATER:

RECO .:: . ..

PARENT/STAFF TRAINING FORM

KEY: RATINGS:

B . baseline I.,

I . intervention

F . follow-up

t

No correction necessary. ,

2. Verbal suggestion only

3. Verbal suggestion with some physical

correction

4. Necessary to retrain technique

7)

RATING

SEQUENCE OF BEHAVIORS

_

: Colt:2'S POSITION'

II ADULT'S POSITION

1

III ANTICIPATED RESPONSE

NAME

KEY

DATE

,

)

-

Page 159: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Appendix.E

Student Thesis

Page 160: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

TEACHING MOTOR SKILLS TO TWO SEVERELYHANDICAPPED INFANTS - A COMPARISON OF APPROACHES

A thesis submitted to the faculty ofSan Francisco State University-in partial fulfillment of the

requirements for the '

degreeMaster of Arts

by

MARGARET ANN VELTMAN

San Francisco, California

September, 1981

Page 161: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CERTIFICATION OF 'APPROVAL

I certify that I have read TEACHING MOTOR SKILLS TO

TWO 'SEVERELY HANDICAPPED INFANTS - A COMPARISON OF

APPROACHES by Margaret Ann Veltman, and that in myopinion

this wOrk meets the criteria for approving 'a thesis sub-

mitted in partial fulfillment of requirements for the

Master of Arts degree at San Francisco State University.

35171 J. Hanson, Pg:57-Ledturer, Department ofSpedial Education

Wayne S. Sailor, Ph.D.Chairman, Department ofSpecial Education'Severely MultiplyHandicapped

Norm Wallen, Ph.D.Chairman, Department ofSpecial Education

1 '7,,

Page 162: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'16

TABLE OF CONTENTS

page,-

LIST OF TABLES

LIST OF__FIGURESII

CHAPTER I: Introduction

CHAiTER II: Review of'the Literature

1

6

CHAPTER III: Methods and Procedures 21

Subjects 21

Setting b23-

Learning/ Equipment ,23

.Experimental Design 24

Independent Variable 25

Dependent Variables 26

. Experimental Phases 27

Exkerimental Procedures 29

Data Collection and Analyses 30

Reliftbility30

CHAPTER IV: Results 31

Motor Response and Approximations .31

Visual Fixation, Smiling and Vocalizations 34

Fussing and Crying 34

State. of Arousal47

Reliability50

CHAPTER V: Discussion 51

BIBLIOGRAPHY57

.APPENDICES64

1. parental Consent Form65

2. Diagram of Classroom 67

3. Brazelton's'States (Adapted) 69

4. Pilot Procedures71

5. Pretest Procedures74

6. Treatment 1 Procedures77

7. Treatment 2 Procedures 80

8. Diagrams of Learning Equipmeni:Weight Bearing

84

Weight Bearing Wiring. 85

Bilateral Reach/Grasp86

Bilateral Reach/Grasp Wiring 87

Page 163: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

0

LIST OF TABLES'

1. State of Arousal -Subject 1 48

2. State of Arousal -Subject 2 ... .. 49

0

ii

Page 164: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

a LIST OF FIGURES

1. Multiple Baseline Data Graphs

Motor Responses - Subject 1Approximations - Subject 1Motor Responses - Subject 2Approximations - Subject 2Visual Fixation - Subject 1

- Subject 2

Page,

323335363738

Smiling - Subject 1 39- Subject 2 40

Vocalizations - Subject 1 41- Subject 2 42

Fussing - Subject 1 .... . 43Crying -.Subject 1 44Fussing - Subject 2 45Crying - Subject 2 46

/2. Classroom Layout (in Appendix 2) 67 .-

3. Experimental Procedures (in Appendices 4,5, 6, and 7)

- Pilots 71

Pretests ° .74

Treatment 1 ,- 77Treatment 2 ..... . 80 -

4. Learning Equipment (in Appendix 8)

Weight Bearing . ... 84Weight Bearing Wiring ... ...... 85Bilateral Reach/Grasp .. .... 86Bilateral Reach/Grasp Wiring 87

-.,

Page 165: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CHAPTER I.

Introduction

The early responses of infants reflect their

efforts to explore and control their environments. The

more opportunities children have to test behavior, ihe

more liYely they are to modify their own actions and

cope with their surroundings. The predominate concern for

handicapped infants is that they too are provided with

experiences which will result in satisfying interactions

(Conner, Williamson, and Siepp, 1978).

Severely handicapped infants may have severely

limited behavioral options. Under such circumstances,

successful environmental transactiOns must necessarily

be facilitated, or exaggerated, enabling infants to

identify relationships between events.

Cause and effect, or contingent relationships

imply that actions are ccditional; that they control or

are controlled by other actions. Active participation in

deciphering contingencies is an inherent prerequisite to

learning, and it is a continual process, requiring

increasingly complex manipulations of our Anvironmerits.

Since intellectual competence is largely detetmined by the

fability to deduce an outcome from prior experienc s,, the

1

Page 166: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

2

condition or status of an organism is partially dependent

upon the extent to which these action-pairings are

realized. Under normal circumstancds, the organism

enco1nter3 contingent situations repeatedlys Once

relationships between actions are understood, behavior can

be elicited predictably, and according to need. Thus,

through exposure, experience, and modification, we learn

to manipulate our environment 1/ effectively.

The behavioral school of thought postulates that

learning is primarily the result of the interactions an

organism engages in with extrinsic environmental elements.

Developmentalists maintain that these experiences are

essential to higher cognitive functions. Piaget, an

interactionalist, describes the experiences in terms of

normal maturational occurrences in the sensorimotor

stages of development, (the period from birth to two years

of age). He outlines the infant's progressive inter-

actional initiations beginning with purely reflexive

actions, followed by a preoccupation with the actions4

themselves, to a rudimentary, and finally, a functional

understanding of the means-ends'relationship.

How we incorporate feedback from our environ- .

ments and how well we learn to use this information to

further control over our changing surroundings only

becomes an issue when.the process is se Alow interrupted.

Under severe, physical handicapping conditions, inter-

actional initiations, in particular, those subtly emitted

Page 167: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

3

by the infant, may not be detected by the environment.

In unresponsive surroundings,.the orportunity to derive

cause and effect information is restricted, possibly

impeding higher learning. Special educators have

developed curricula for the school-aged segment of this

population to insure feedback for specific responses.

The majority of these programs follow an operant paradigm,

whereby the student is typically both cued and rewarded or

reinforced for a targeted behavior. Interactions are

monitored and cOntrolled. These techniques have gained

increased popularity in the area of severely handicapped

because of their effectiveness in facilitating skill

acquisition. They are not, however, always appropriate

for use with infants who may habituate (show a response

decrement to repeated presentations of a stimulus), pass

through different states of arousal, require short

latency periods for reinforcement, and move in increments

that cannot always be assessed with relative accuracy.

Prosthetic devices have also been employed with

school-aged and older severely handicapped people. Some

offer assistance through providing the individual with

personal or bodily adaptations, (artifical limbs, pointing

devices, splints, etc.). Others facilitatezresponding via

adaptation or arrangement of the environment. Examples of

these are seating and standing equipment,for static

positioning and inflatables (swim rings), for encouraging

dynamic or active responses (Kasari and Filler, 1981). A

18i

Page 168: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

subcategory of the latter group include 'actual manipu-

landa, or learning devices, which may detect, measure

and/Or consequate a given behavior. It is unfOrtunate

that the consequence, in order to be reinforcing for older

severely handicapped persons, is often not functionally

related to the targeted response thus creating a

contrived situation.

Though advances continue-to be made in these

areas, the crucial time to intervene is when interaction

naturally begins, in infancy. Since an individual

theoretically formulates cause and effect relationdhjps

from feedback s/he receives as a result of actin,g upon

the environment, prosthetics alone do not constitute an

adequate remediation. Curricula designed for older

children, unless modified in light of issues specific to

infancy, would likewise be inappropriate. The severely

handicapped infant who is physically impaired mUst be

given every opportunity to initiate interactions with the

environment through normal channels. A device sensitive .

enough to detect Minute motoric changes and efficient

enough to provide contingent reinforcement within a

specific latency period, may provide the optimal

conditions for an exchange to occur. The training of

functional motor responses, consequated by naturally

ensuing phenomena, when possible, may enhance further

initiations, exploration and learning in this tradition- 4

ally difficult population.

18>

Page 169: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.. 5

From a theoretical standpoint, understanding

cause and effect relationships is prerequisite to higher

cognitive processes. The possibility exists, then, that

the failure to learn under severe handicapping conditions

may at least be partially due to an inability to establish

these relationships. Learning devices may provide the

vehicle by which such information is gained.

The purpose of this investigation was to

.1) measure the efficacy of employing 1 arning devices

to teacl- functional motor responses, and 2) foster the

understanding of cause and effect, relationships in

severely handicapped infants. This method was compared

to a therapeutic approach, currently the standard inter-

vention strategy used in 'many infant programs, whereby

the physical or occupational therapist directs or

provides "hands-on" motor training:

Page 170: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CHAPTER II

Review of the Literature

"A major form of' mythology about infancy has

been that the infant, especially during the neonatal

period, is an incomplete, relatively incompetent and

inadequate organism; and that by a series of linear

progressions, the infant becomes a complex, competent,

and complete organism - an adult. Such a vtew is a

logical and emotional heritage of the supposedly dis-

carded notion that the infant i a miniature adult with

a tabula rasa, helpless and passive, dependent on an

imprint from the mature caretaker who provides a model

for limitation and a stimulus for.learning adult modes

of thinking and behavior." (Thoman, 1979). Research

findings, however, have-shown that the neonate is

equipped, at birth, to actively engage in interaction

with the environment. For example, data strongly suggest .

that a baby's hearing is functional by 32 weeks gestation

(Eisenberg, 1970), that newboins are capable of conjugate

eye movements (Dayton, Jones, Steele, and Rose, 1964),

visual tracking across horizontal and vertical planes

,(Drazelton, Scholl, and Robey, 1966), and visual fixation

at an eight inch distance (Haynes, White, and Held, 1965).

6

Page 171: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

7

The perceptual competencies of the young infant, such as

depth perception and size/distance relationships, are

likewise identified in the literature (Bower, 1966; Bower,

1965; Campos, Langer, and Krowitz, 1970), along with

,evidence that infants even have gustatorial preferences

(Nisbett and Gurwitz, 1970; Desor, Maller, and Turner,

1975; Engen, Lipsitt, and Peck, 1974). We now suspect

that the behavioral repertoire of a normal newborn infant

allows for the accommodation of characteristic care-

giving exchanges between the baby and her/his parents

(Goldberg, 1977; Schaffer, 1971).

Learning then, does not occur in a passive

sense, in the absence of at least rudimentary responses,

nor does it emerge entirely as a product of pre-programmed

genetic processes as a baby grows older. Deprivation

studies involving animals (Harlow, 1958; Harlow and

Harlow, 1965; Harlow and Zimmermann, 1959; and Maier,

1949), and young institutionalized children (Froirence

and Lipton, 1962) highlight the role of the environment

in the development of normal intellectual or pre-

requisite functions. Further, experimenters have

discovered that by manipulating environmental events

according to a specific strategy, responses can

predictably be elicited, shaped, lengthened, 4eneral-

ized or completely eliminated (Reese and Lipsitt, 1970;

Snell and Smith, 1978; Haring, 1977; Kauffman and Snell,

1977; White and Haring, 1976; Axelrod, 1977; Kazdin, 1975).

16.ti

Page 172: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

8

Various manifestations of classical and operant con-

ditioning are now, considered responsible, by many

learning theorists, for much of our behavior. Consequently,

the operant paradigm appears in several published curricula

designed. for school-aged severely handicapped 'children

(Guess, Sailor, and Baer, 1976; Fredei.icks, 1976).

Classical (Fitzgerald and Brackbill, 1976) and

operant training techniques have likewise proved to be

effective at the level of infancy. The operant method,

in particular, when used either alone or in combination

with classical conditioning, was found to be successful

in changing behavior (reviewed in Sherrod, Vietze, and

Friedman, 1978; Ramey and Ourth, 1971; Sameroff and

Cavanagh, 1979). This research has shown that manipula-.

tion of variables, most frequently, consequences to infant

responses, can alter behavi'or such as head turns, kicks,

coos, and sucks (see Hulsebus, 1973 for reviewS;

Siqueland and Lipsitt, 1906; Rovee and Rovee, 1969;

Watson, 1972; Caron, Caron, and Caldwell, 1971; Fagen and

'Rovee, 1976; and Solkoff and Cotton, 1975). Young infants

even have beenAaught complex discrimination tasks using

conditioning procedures (Sheppard, 1969). Curricula

created specifically for intervntion with infant Popula-\:;

tions lend considerable credence to these findings

(Hanson, 1977; Dennison and Bricker, 1976).

Perhaps the key feature of operant programming

with infants lies in the requirement of active responding

by the baby. While the popular use of "sensory stimulation"

Page 173: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

may have a purpose in eliciting some positive.effects,

(i.e., range of motion to prevent contractures,

proprioceptive feedback to encOurage normal posturing

and sensory experiences in cases of deprivation), it

generally implies passivity An the part of the recipient,

and its exact contributions to child development remain

unclear.

Data gathered from the Fels Infant study.

(see Lewis and Goldberg, 1969), indicated that over

stimulation of an infant's sensory receptors by random

stimuli actually prodUced a decrement in attending

behavior. Under such conditions, the more the infant was

passively stimulated, the less s/he attended. Studies

additionally have,disclosed that there is a response

decrement to repeated stimuli, t'habituation", that may,

in fact, be cortical. It is hypothesized that the brain,

after processing,the intensity, duration and quality of

a signal; retains it, and then produces negative feedback

resulting in a decreased or absent response (Hebb, 1949;

Sokolov, 1963; Lewis, 1967; Lewis, Goldberg, and Rausch,

1967). Without experience, the infant is unable to

control, process or act upon extrinsic stimuli. If these

conditions persist, s/he becomes at risk for a phenomenon

termed "Learned lelplessness" by Martin Seligm-An (1975).

Learned helplessness is characterized boy the cessation

of activity and initiative, and is brought on by

frustrated attempts to engage or control environmental

41 8

9

Page 174: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

10

events. The condition has been observed in animals And

is believed to induce Paychological change within the

organism. It seems to be somewhat related to resignation,

an attitude Maier (i049) describes as having a "lack of

overt behavior", in which "motivation seems to be largely

absent".

Experience, then, must be gained according to

some highly organized plan, in which the organism. is

allowed to actively participate in deciphering, pro-6

cessing and eventually controlling extrinsic environmental

activ:ity. Jean Piiget has hypothesi'zed such a system, ,

which he ,described in the sensorimotor period of develop-

%ient (Piaget, 1959). With the help of intact sensory

receptors (which are largely in a reflexive state), the

neonate randomly moves for, what appears to be the enjoyment

of movement itself (with the exception of survival

responses). Experimentation with available behavior leads

to a rudimentary ability to discriminate the effects pro-

duced by certain actions. In stage three*(secondary

circular reactions) oflPiaget's developmental sequence,

the infant'seeks to continue a pattern which sustains a

pleasurable event. Stfhe finally learns to apply behavior

across situati,,,a, modifying them when appropriate. Piaget

attached special significance to the third stage of the

sensorimotor period because he felt it marked the onset

of intelligence. This stage includes intentignality, a

shift in interest from the response itself to the

1 81)

Page 175: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

11

consequence of the response, memory and the'beginnings of

"contingency awareness" (Watson, 1966). Contingency

awareness refers to "an organism's readiness to react

adaptively in a contingency situation and to an organism's

sensitivity in the perception of contingency situations

when they occur," (Watson, 1966). Watson further suggests

that contingency awareness creates motivation to rect

further environmental change. Evidence of the motivation

was found in infants' responses to contingent experience.

Infants responded at higher rates when placed in a

contingent condition, (i.e., infant response produced

oUtcome), than in noncontingent, (i.e., outcome occurred

independent of infant response), and baseline conditions.

The contingent situation produced other positive effects'

such as increased attending, smiling and cooing. In this

experiment, using normal infants as subjects, head turns

produced the turning Of a mobile. Other studies in this

area have shown that infants have responded with

nutritive sucking contingent upon a head turn (Siqueland

and Lipsitt, 1966), non-nutritive sucking for visual

stimulation (Stern and Jeffrey, 1965), kicking to activate

a mobile (Solkoff and Cotton, 1975), vocalizations to

provide adult vocalization (Ramey afid Ourth, 1971), foot

thrusts to create conjugate visual stimulation (Rovee

and Rovee, 1969), social reinforcement contingent on a

touching response (Millar, 1976), and.contingent affective

responses between mother and infant (Lewis and Goldberg,

Page 176: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

12m

1969). The contribution of these experiences toward the

motivation for further exploration and learning remain

speculative. The consistent findings of increased

positive and active target behavibr do, however,'indicate

that infants are motivated to interact" with the environ-

ment under contingent circumstances.

The motivation to learn was formalfy thought

to result from psychological drives. In 195q, White

hypothesized that motivation waS rather born out of

feelings of "efficacy", as the child con_jpeter_yitl engaged

in active exploration and manipulation of the environment.

Jennings, Harmon, Morgan, Gaiter, and yarrow referred to

14,

it as "mastery motivation" in 1979. Wenar (1964), called

it "executive competence", combining the theories of

White and Ausubel to deScribe these eesponses in one year

olds. Watson (1972), and Watson and Ramey (1972) found

correlations between theoinfants' activities and their*

affective behavior. Goldberg argues that early social

relationships are ehhanced by mutual feelings of efficacy

derived from reciprocal contingent interactions betwi-en

infants and caregivers (Goldberg, 1977). Watson reasons

that the nature of an infant's interactions are far less'

significant than the manner in which they take place.

In other words, regardless of its content, if a

situation provides a contimgent relationship, it has,

value. Watson hypothesizes that an infant's first aware-

ness of a clear contingency normally emerges from the

Page 177: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

game-like interactions s/he engages in with her/his

parents. Concerning the value of the responses involved

he states simply, "The Gameis NOT important to the infant,

because people play it, but rather people ioecome.important,

to the infant because they play 'The dame" (WatsOn4 1972

And Watson 1979).

The interactions experienced-by. handicapped

infants may le both qualitatively an..7 quantitatively

different from thoSe experienced by normal babies.

Sensory deprivation during formative.periods of develoi

ment can result in failure Of tile deprived sensery

system to develop and function normalay. Neurophysio-

logical structuees 1.in these instances, have shown

abnormal growth from the distal sensory receptors,

through tfie sensory relay nuclei, to the cerebral cortex.

(Prescott, 1976). Information may be confusing, sporAdic

or simply inadequate for processing. Reflexes may be

absent, or abnormal, jeopardizing even survival. Move-

ment may be limited, involuntary or insufficient to

produce any effect, and thus the environment may offer no

constructive feedback. The typical route to development

is interrupted, normal channels of interaction blocked,,

and the infant derives frustration from futile efforts

at making sense of her/his surroundings. Severe and/or

multiple handicapping conditions may deny a child the

means to engage the interactional system. Additionally,

through continual unsuccessful, unreinforced attempts to

191

Page 178: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

establiSh new behavior, the multaply handicapped 'infant

may accept incompetence and learn helplessness.

There are, however, indications that the

negative effects of sensory deprivation Can at least be

lessened. In 1957, Norris, Spaulding, and Brodie con-

cluded that blind infants showed selective developmental

lags (Cattell Infant Intelligence Scale) in those areas

'in which they'lacked experience. They also noted that

those infants who had bees allowed ahd encouraged to

explore their environment showed less of a deficiency;

(reported in Warren, 1977).

Though existing curricula for older severely

handicappedchildren may serve as a viable.resource

(Guess, 'Sailoi, Baer, 1976; Fredericks, 1976), they

would have to be considerably adapted to laccornmodate

behaVior specific to infancy. For instance, an inter-

trial interval, a peripd to.provide for clear onset and

offset, data recording and reinforcement, could be no

longer than a few seconds in duration (Millar, 1972;

Ramey and Ourth, 1971: Sherrod, Vietze, and Friedman,

1978; Watson, 1967); stimuluspresentations and conse-

quences must remain moderately novel to maintain the

infant's interest and prevent habituation (Kagan, 1'970;

McCall, 1973), and states of arousal must be monitored

to insure the infant is performing when most alert

(Brazelton, 1973;Wolff,.1976). . Curricula also are

available for developmentally delayed infants and

Page 179: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

15

toddlers (Fredericks, 1976; Brf.cker,.1976; Hanson, 1977).

These programs are typically equipped with sets of tasks

representing differ,ent stages of developmeA-, and,include

behavioral training procedures. Theke curricula, however,

are primarily product rather than proceas oriented, arid

are therefore more concerned with skill acquisition than,

facilitating cognitive thought patterns. By including

a hpecific inst*uctionalstrategy for the attainment of

a specific skill,.there is a chance that the response

will be trained Ania-single, isolated context. Without

additional diverse experiences Utilizing the thought'

process involved, generalization of the skill may be .

precluded.

Clearly, alternative intervention methods for

severely handicapped infants mustioe explored. Tech-

niques should be designed to incorporate both behavior

specific to infancy, and the precision necessary to

pinpoint and accommodate minute iesponses.

Prosthetics and adaptive'equipment are common.

to special education settings. Traditional uses have

been to "prevent or alleviate deformities in the child

and neurological and 'or orthopedic problems", and/or

to "enable the child to function more normally in

therapy, in the classroom, or at home", (Campbelll Green,

And Carlson, 1977). During the past few years, several

experimenters have also discovered that such equipment

could be employed as teaching aids. Mechanical and*

Page 180: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

electronic devices.complimented the operant teaching

paradigm by offering increased precision in both.the

detection and measurement of responses. Reinforcement

also could be dispensed systematicaly, eliminating

teacher error. The eduAtional merit was realized and

now the use of adaptive devices 'to elicit learning

responses is rapidly becoming a recognized feasibility.

Typically, a salient reinforcer is made available for a

given response; which ie measured by the,apparatus. The

experiments, primarily*'With older, severely and physically

handicapped individualb have'yielded promising results.

Most,utilized sensitive adaptive equipment to measure and

contingently reinforce slight changeS in behavior, i.e.,

increased range of motion (Ball, Combs, Rugh, and Neptune,

1977), controlled arm movements (Murphy and &nighty; 1977),

drawer pulling and doorknob rotation.(Friedlander, Kamin,

and Hesse, 1974), and head posture (Ball, McCrady, and

Hart, 1975); More recently,_Zuromski and colleagues,.

(Zuromski, Smith, and Brown, 1977; Acctino and Zurotski,

1978) have demonstrated that electromechanical devices

can be used to teach sitple discrimination tasks and motor

responses (i.e., arm movements) to multi-liandicapped

t.institutionalized children.

Commonly in these studies, %here is a lisparity

between the targeted-response and the consequencc,. A

possible explanation for this condition may be

difficulty one encounters finding salient reinf rcere for

.16

0

Page 181: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

17

severely handicapped persons. Strong.reinforcement is

necessitated by a lack of motivation to,perform skills

that otherwise hold little meaning for the subject. The

targdted response may be acquired, but the situation

remains 1;Ighly contriVed, and may require additional

training f* generalization. The'functionality of the

skill, by definition, becomes questionable. Guess,

Horner, Utley, Holvoet, Maxon, Tucker, and Warren, 1978, .

'set the following-criteria for fUnctionality. A functional

rdsponse is one that 'U.), _Produces an immediate con-

sequenCe for the childf 2) Is reinforcing; and 3) Combined

with the consequence, Is natural to*the child's inter-

-action with the:socio-ecologicil or prosthetic environment".'

Teaching an isolated skill, unrelated to its consequence,

does not qualify as natural to a child's interaction with

the environment.

The major role of learning devices in most.of

these experiments appears to be to increase or teach a

-given response. Learning devices can also be used to

teach cause and effect.rerationships. The subject learns

that _the response is important because it produces an

effect, or change in conditions that s/he can control.

The consequationv approach and degree of response may be

manipulated per device. If the terminalobjective is

cause and effect understanding, then variety must be

employed to increase the probability that the skill will

generalize. Perhaps contrived situations could be

19,0

4

Page 182: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

18

avoided by 'providing opportunities with contingency

devices:early in the pos't natal,period. Ideally,

naturally occurring phenomena would then become

sufficiently reinforcing,'eliminating the need for .

exaggerated and conspicuous training techniques with

severely handicapped persons.

The advantage a_learning aevices ari many. They

include: detection of minute changes in r onding,

Systematic and immediate consequationt easy set-up and4

transport, and simple cbnstruction. Most importantly,

they can usually be hdapted or modified to suit individual

needs and diverse programs, which makes them Post

efficient and lessens the possibility that they will be

misused.

Learning devices are by no means a parent o;

teacher substitute. -In .fact consequation may well involve

contingent interactions with an adult (Ramey and Ourth,

1971; and Watson, 1966). Learning davices primarily serve

as accurate indicators of behavior that may otherwise not

be identified by the environment.

laarilaa

Theoretical perspectives and evidence gathered

in research investigations document that infants require

active involvement with the environtent for optimal

development. Normally, an infant is born with sensory

receptors and a behavioral repertoire ready to

accommodate exchanges with her/his surrouridings. With

1 96

Page 183: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

1

,repeated exposure 'and experimentation, the infants learns

to anticipate and control cause and effect associationa.

The motivation to initiate further understanA.ing,Of

environmental phenomena may result from the feelinda.of

efficacy the infant derives from,suCcessful interaCtions.'

Mhen an,infant is unable to control the environment,

s/he may become.frustrated and acceptItncempetence.

Severely senaory and/or physically impaired 'children are

at risk for learning helplessness becaupe they canhot

achieve interaction through normal channels. The

environment often does 'not recognize their attempits be-

cause they may be difficult to detect, and,therefore, it

does not offer feedback. Training techniques to prevent

the lack A feedback have been incorporated into.curricula

designed for severely handicapped childrenio Such pro-

cedures have also been incorporated into curricula for

developmentally delayed infants and toddlers. The

problems apparent in many of these programs are; 1) they

do not address issues of infant behavior; 2) they train

isolted skills instead of concepts;',and 3) they depend

on human observation only for the assessment of responses.

Learning devices, though primarily used for

other purposes in the past, may prove useful tools in the .

detection, measurement and'consequation of minute

responses'erhitted by handcapped babies. Perhaps they can

also aids.in teaching Cause and effect relationships,

a)functional response that Aay eliminate the need for

1

19

Page 184: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

exaggerated or contrived training techniques later'onijn

1

life. A mdre obvious use is to.increase oi teach

iSolated motor skills. 'The advantages.of employing such

equipnent are many. They:may\be used in combination with

training from. he parent(s):or teacher, they are cost

efficient, adjustibld and easy to transport.

This study'investigates the effects of'daining,

two motor responses on learning equipmet. This procedure

is then compared to.,a more common, 'Illand...-on" approach',

,involving consultation: wi.th an occupational therapist.

A

Page 185: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

CHAPTER IZI

Methods and Procedures

Subjects

The infants involved in this investigation

were choden from those enr011ed in the Richmond Early

Childhood Education Project'(RECEP), a fe-derally.funaed

demonstrationjmoject affiliated with Virginia Common-''t

wealth University and the RichoOnd Public SOoól.system.,

This program presently serves infants and pteschoo ers

from birth to six years*of age who are determined to beI .

at leastfifty percent 7 more delayed in their develop-

ment. This means that with prematurity taken into

consideration (corrected age); their developmental skill

levels resamblq thode.of either a child half their'ade or

younger. RECEP encourages parent participation and bothIN

parents and staff ere trained in various interventions

with all children. Out of the 18 infants (birth to two

years) atending, only two resembled each qther motori-

cally and needed training qn similar skills. Both'

subjects were black males aged between 12 and 24 monthsV

hactsevere motoric delays and significant developmcintal

delaysiqn most othet skill areas. The parents of both'

sulijects also eXpresz;ed a wilaingness to have their infants

participate in the study.

21

Page 186: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

22

Subject one was described as being.hypotonic,

with low muscle tone and a floppy appearance. He had

*head control, righting responses and some sitting balance.

The public sctlool visual itinerant reporteq tha.t this

infant had acuity, and slow /but present tracking responses.

He was 22 months old when the investigation began.ft

Subject two was described as having ataxic

movement,*charcterized by fluctuating muscle tone. He

also had head control, righting responses and sOme.sitting

a balance. Visual responses were likewise intact for this

subject. He was 1(4 months of age at the beginning of the

.study.

An assessment conducted by the oàcupational

therapist (Developmental Screening. Inventory; Gesell

and Amatruda, revised, 1980), and the investigator

(UniforM Performance Assessnient Scale; White, Edgar

and Haring-, 1978), prior to the investigation showed that

both subjeCts had unilateral reaching responses. Voli-

tional grasps w6re absent in the repertoire of subject

one and minimal for subject two. Reflexive behavior had

evidently been integrated in both infants. Both were able

to bear weight momentarily in a prone position* on their

forearms. Weight bearing,on extended arm-Fibuld not be

elicited in either infant.

Prior to experimental treatment, the parents

of each subject were given written explanations of the

study. The investigator then met with each in order to

)

Page 187: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

answer questions and address concerns. . At this time the

tentative training sthedules were dfscussed and consent

forms, (included in the appendices)'irere signed.

getting

The infants received training for bqh treai-.

ments in the infant,\classroom. This room is located in4/

a self-contained public school for the severely handi-

tapped. Preparatory procedures for tkeatment 1 were

administered in the center of the classroom on a carpeted

floor (night bearing) and in the same location in a

carrier for the bilateral reach/grasp response. Sessions,

were viddo-taped with a Sony portable tape player, a

camera and a monitor. The taping-on the equipment took

place in the southeast corner of the classroom, facing

a wall consisting predominately of windows. Videbtape

equipment remained visible over hll phases. A black

curtain,situated on either side of the devices was used

evf

to minimize visual 4istraction. (See Tendix 2 for dia-

gram of classroom.) Exact conditions existed throughout

the study with the exception of sporadic peribds of

background noise.---j

dr. \i.-C I?

The equipment was constructed to fit the

infants' needs with input from the occupational therapist.

e /

4.., ...

4

One utilized microswitches that could be triggered by a

certe.n amount of pressure. It was designed to detect

and consequate equal weight bearing. ?e.Other device,

had a wire and' conductive.tape switch,. its purpose was

20[.1

23

Page 188: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

24

to train a bilateral reach/grasp. .The,reinforcement

contingent on these responses was chosen froth those

/stimuli reported in research studies to be preferred by

normal infants (i.e., reflective colored paper and

lights). Habituation and satiating effects were

imized by staggering A.M. and P.M training sessions and (

'-'

rotating visual displays (three per device)-every ttme a-

subject used a particular piece of equipment.

Additionally, the two sets of displays differed with

respect to each other. yDifferpnt combinatidns of colored

Christmas-lights were used forthe weight'bearing device

while illuminated foil and colored acetate was used for

the bilateral reach/grasp equipment. Design specificatins,of the learning eqUipment are included inppbndix 8.

Responses were counted during ten minute sessions

beginning approxiMately 10 seconds after the infant was

positioned for each of the treatment phases.

Experimental Design

A single case, multiple baseline design within

subjects and across tasks was.used for this study. The°

design is typidally used to show the effects of treatment

.andlgeneralization by intervening on a single variable

a time, while carrying out another or others under

baseline conditions. In this way, functional relation-

'ships between treatment procedures and changes in

behavior can be identified (Hanson and Be14.amy, 1977;,

4414

Hersen and Barlow, 19 This study differs pnly in'

Page 189: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

that it includes a. treatment (1) that c.an also be.

2perceived as an additional baseline or intermediary phase

to which the experimental'condition was compared.- The

.motor responses chosen, in keeping with the design, were

both topographically and functionally dissimilar.

,Baseline data was collected over a four day

peribd prior to treatment to insure that the responses

41.

were not already in the subjects, repeitoire. Training'

using (treatment i procedures (standard) was initiated

25

Cr'

for both skills following baseline for each subject,,,andIC-

carried out for 10 sessions. Treatment 2 (learning

equipment) was then implemented, and training with this AJ.

A' e .

procedure occurred for another 10 sessions involving

only one.response per subject. A three session continu-

ation of prior conditions was afdded one week after the

experimental phase had terminated. The study ran for a

duration of fourteen'weeks.

Independent Variable

Treatment orocedurei, standard (1), and those

involvin4 the learnikg equipment (2)', constituted the

3 independent variable.

a. Treatment 1 consisted of two motor trainidg

procedures conceived-ofcooperatively by the

classroom teacher and occupational therapist

on staff. The program followed an operant

or measurable paradigm and employed tecnniques

borrowed from Bobath and Rood. Subjectso

received proprioceptive input, were prbmpted,

and reinforced with tacti.leand miditory

praise. The light displays were continuous.'"

JSee. ppendiX 6.)

203

Page 190: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

26 f

b. Treatment 2 utilized learning equipmentto train the two motor responses. Thereinforcement available (light displays) (.A''

was response contingent. Subjects wereprompted only. (See pendix 7.)

Dependent Variables

The dependent variables were:

1) motor skill acquisition, as meaSured by rate of res-

ponding

bilateral readh/grasp: bilateral reach andsimultaneous grasp of lateral portions of steering

wheel on apparatus independent of prompting

weight bearing: eq4al-distribution of weight anextended arms in lateral midpoint sectors of, switch

platform with palms down, independent of prompting

2) approximation of motor skill, as measured by rate of

responding

bilateral reach/ ras : maintenance of a prompt,

contact of han s or close proximity of hands (within

a two inch distance to lateral portions of steering

wheel)

wei ht bearin : bilateral hand placement in lateral

m dpoint sectors of switch platform as the result of

prompt maintenance and/or equal 6ut insufficient--4weight bearing on extended arms with palms facing

down and in lateral midpoi:nt sectors of switch

platform

3) attention, as measured by duration of visual fixation

visual fixation: the fixation 00 f the subjects' -eyes

on the display panel provided 'by the device

4) chapge in affect, as measured by frequency of smiling,

voealizations and fussing and duration of crying

smiling: upturning of,corners of mouth

vocalization: voiced, playful and/or unagitated

utterance occurring on a single exhalation

fuss: whine, agitated vocalization_frequentlyaccompanied by a grimace or frown and/or an attempt

to change position, on one exhalation

21)

Page 191: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

cry: 'long, even vocalizations typically accompaniedBY-squinted or closed eyes, tears, and a gasp at the

end of the exhalation

5) Changes in state were documented both before the childwas placed on an apparatus and immediately following

the session. (Reference for deterthining state ofarousal was Brazelton, 1973.) See tppendix 3 for

definitions.

Experimental Pnases

Pilot. Both leaining devices were pils.)ted

before the investigation to,make sure they weret

mechanitally sound. The two additional subjects chosen

to test the devices were both black males, one six months

of age and the other, Over twoyears: 'one was severely

handicapped, the other, within normal limits cognitively.

Both were mildly motOrically i aired. Parental consent

was obtained to run these Sessi ns, which were also video-

taped. Both subjectS were.successful in activating both

pieces'of learning equipment.

Baseline. Baseline data was collected on each

experimental subject in order to determine whether or not

responses were present in their.repertoiie. The subjects

were positioned on the learning equipment for four 100

minute sessions per device. Three second physktal

prompts were given initially and after a one minute

duration. Light displays were continuous and no conse-

Aquation was available for responses. (See ,ppendix 5.)

Treatment'l. Treatment 1 described a standard

motor training strategy involVing a collaborative effort

between the staff occupational therapist and the class-

Page 192: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

room teacher, who devised the program plan. Training

included preliminary proprioceptive procedures, followed

by positioning on the learning equipment. The programs,

which incorporated Bobath and Rood techniques, consisted

of behavioral or measurable descriptions of positioning,

stimulus presentation, and consequation (tactile and

auditory) for appropriate responses. (See appendix 6

for indepth description.)

Treatment 2. Treatment 2 involved the adaptive

learning equipment and required therapeutic input only to

identify the tasks to be taught and.to determine the

bhild's position prior to interaction with the equipment.

-

Reinforcement in the form of colored light displays for

28

a targeted motor response was provided by closing electronic

circuits. Reinfor.cement was available only at the time

the targeted behavior was being performed. That is,

'the consequation and response bccurred simultaneously.

(See appendix 7.)) I

The treatment with the learning equipment took ' 1

place in two ten minute sessions per day, once in the

early mornipg and once at noon, three to four days per

week (usually Tuesday through Friday). Prior to the

experiment, the investigator determined that these

particular subjects would be alert auring these times.

The sessions remained uniform throughout the study.

Carryover of treatment 1,procedures into

1

. routine caregivingactivities occurred to a certain

Page 193: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

>,

extent during the time when treatment 2 was im effect.

For example, training in self-feeding necessarily

.

inVolved additional work on reaching and grasping.

Training on the equipment, however, was restricted to

the designated teaching times..

Additional Sessions. A continuation of prior

phases was taped one week after the termination Of the

sessions containing the experimental treatments.* These

few sessions provided additional information as to the

maintenance of skills acquired under the same conditions.

E.2,2_aer.P,r1,2IreSerir

A prompting procedure was Used over all condi-

tions, occurring once, at the beginning of.each session,......_

and aaain one minute after the session had begun. For,

weight bearing, the prompt,consisted of downward predsure

t

,

on the subjects' shoulders while elbows were extended and

palms were resting downward on the switch platform. Each

prompt lasted for a three second duration. Prompting for

bilateral reach/grasps consisted of a full hand prompt

(experimentets hands encompass subject) to each hand

around the steering wheel, also.for a three second

duration. All prompts were administered with the

experimenter positioned behind the subject andremained)

uniform throughout the study. No responses occurring,

during prompting were recorded.

Subjects were made comfortable and state was

controlled as much as possible before training. Diapers

r

20 ,

. 29

Page 194: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

/

were.checked, and if necessary, changed, noses, were wiped

or suctioned, and subject's were dressed ,appropriately.

Subjects were not trained if they were ill

sleeping or crying. states. If crying occurred during

training, thb experimenter attempted to comfort the

infant on the equipment while continuing the spssion. If

sleeping occurred, the'session was terminated.

Data Collection and Analyses

Weight bearing responses and approximations,,

bilaterhl reach/grasP approximations, visual fixation and

crying wete measured by the number of seconds they occurred.o

Bilateral"reach/grasp motor responses, Smiling, vocaliza-

tions and fussing were measured'by frequency of occurrence.

Data on the frequency or duration of the responses were

collected by the experimenter after reviewing the video-

tapes.. Research assistants were then emPloyed to separately

read and record all of the same responses after they were

screened and scored on the components of each behavior they

were observing. The results of this study were analyzed by

. a visual comparison of slopes of the acquistion of

behavior occurring under the two training conditions.

11.-Lit=2.LDserveriabilit

Interobserver reliability checks were performed

on all behavior for all sessions. Percent of agreement

was calculated by dividing the number of obsekver

agreements by the number of agreements p1us.4-disagree-:

ments and then multiplying the quotient by 100.

200

,

30

A

Page 195: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'

CHAPTER IV

Results

4

Motor Re222.0211;JnauL21222:2202aLiena

Subject I exhibited few responses under both

standard and experimental training conditions on the

bilateral reach/grasp equipment. Standard training pro-

cedures, used throughout to elicit the weight bearing

behavior (Subjedt'l), were likewise unsuccessful. Thei:e

were, however, increaseS in approximations of these

responses. Bilateral reach/grasp gpproximations'first

occurred in the last session of baseline. During treat-

ment I, they increased, peaked, and then subsided. Under

treatment 2, they became variable, but weke still hivh

and climbing at the end of the phase. One week later,

in post-training sessions, the rate of responding had

been maintained. Approximated weight bearing responses

for the same subject were ariable, and decreased from

the first to Second treatment (11 phase. Responding

during post-training.sessions accelerated, possibly

indicating a repetition of the variable pattern seen in

earler training. (See figures 1 and 2.)

. 31

20 i

Page 196: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

)

21

SUBJECT 1.

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP : 100% RELIABILITY

100

90

80

ZO

60

so

40

30

20

10

0DAY.

SESSION

100

,N

80

70

60

5,P

46

30

20

10

0:DAY

ts) SESSION

:BASELINE T1

,....

T2

r

,.

POSTSESSION

..

T T H T T H

2 4 6 8

T W TH T W TH T

2 4 5 7 9 12 14

WEIGHT BEARING : 100% RELIABILITY

BASELINE

1

04

T1

NI W T H15 1/ 20

t

W TH F T W TH F T W

2 it 5 7 9 12 14 15 17 20

,

T1e.

r

T W TH1 2 3

e

ivsr-scssioN

i' sw,

T TH T TH T W TH T W TH T IA W TH T WTHF T.WTHF T W T W M3 5 7 ' 1 3 8 8 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 18 18 19 1 2 3

r ..

21.1.

Page 197: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 1

BILATERAL REACH -GRASP : 901% RELIABILITY

275 BASELINE

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

so

25

0DAY

SESSION

T1T 2 POST- SESSION

IC

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

25

T TH T TH2 4 6 8

T WTHT WTHT MWTH T W TH F T W TH F T W

2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 17. 20 2 4 5 7 9 12 44 15 17 20

WEIGHT BEARING :91% RELIABILITY

BASEL INE T1

T TH T TH1 3 5 7

T 1

T W TH1 2 3

POST-SESSION

IC

T WTHT WTH T MWTH T W THF T W THF T W T W TH

1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 2 3

XI 4

3 U)rn 0

.ZC cn

m

3m >Z

73

*0Cn Xrn-0o .?!.4

213

Page 198: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

34

Weight bearing motor responses appeared under

treatment 2 conditions for subject 2. The bilateral

/ reach/grasp behaviortrained under standard treatment (1)

procedures showed little change from ptase to phase.

ApproximatiOns of the weight bearing Motor response

similarly accelerated under treatment 2 conditiCms, while

approximations of reach/grasp behavior were generally

variable; with lowered responses at the terminatiOn of

treatment 1 and poi3t-training sessions. (See figures 3

and 4.)

Visual Fixation Smilin and Vocalizations

Visual, smiling and vocal responses for both

subjects were variable and did not change significantly

as a result of treatment. (See figures 5, 6, 7, 8,.9 and

10.)

Fussing and Crying

.Fussing and crying occurred infrequently during

training with the bilateral reach/grasp equipment. The

incidence of these responses did not seem specific to

any treatment phase for either subject. (See figures 11,

121,13/and 14.)

Fussing on the weight bearing equipment ,was

'high and variabae for subj., and increased in the

second phase of the standard treatment strategy. These

increases occurred simultaneoUsly with decreases in the

infant's crying responses. (See figures 11 and 12.)

Fussing and crying behavior were similarly variable for

Page 199: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

ot

SUBJECT- 2

WEIGHT 'BEARING ":85.7% REMABILITY

BASEb.INE T1

100

so

, 80

80

50

40

ao

20

10

0DAY W F M M T W T H T W T H F W T H TSESSION 2 4Q 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12 14. 15 18 20

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :100% "RELIABILITY

4e.

12

4

BASELINE T1

100

90 fr

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0DAYSESSION

2,I6

F TH3 5 7

T WTHT WTHFWTHF3 6 8 10 11 13 18 17 20

W TH F T W TH T W F

2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20

T1

POST-SVSSION

X

1 2 3

03F m> 5x

."1> Dor

POST-SESSION m 313.z0 0o frin

w-0 z1 CI

13

0

1' W TH F T W TH T W F T VI F1 2 31 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20

216

Page 200: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 2

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

so

WEIGHT BEARING :92% RELIABILITY

BASELINE

1.

T1

25

0...m...Z..,.................~DAY WF MM T WTHT WTHF WTHT TWTHF T WTHTWF T W F

SESSION 2 4 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12- 14 15 18 20 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20 1 2 3

T 2 POST- SESSION

)

.

xc.

0.

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

25

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :93.7% RELIABILITY

BASELINE

0 . 4.......

T1 T1 ii

POST-SE:SION

2 1 II DAY W F TH F

SESSION 1 3 5 7

T WTHT WTHF WTHF T W TH F T W TH T W F

1 3 8 8 10 /1 13 18 17 20 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20 _ 1 2 3T W F

S

*

4.,

21.6

woN

\

Page 201: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 1

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :92% RELIABILITY

550

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

BASELINE Ti

0DAY TTHTTH YWTHT WTHT MWTHSESSION 2 4 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 17 20

WEIGHT BEARING :89.8% RELIABILITY

550, BASELINE

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0DAYSESSION

2

T1

T2 POST-SESSION

T WTHF T WTHF TAY T W TH2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 17 20 1 2 3

1:3

T TH T TH1 3 5 7

TWTHT WTHTMWTH1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19

TWTHF TWTHF TW1 3 8 8 10 11 13 16 18 19

T W TH1 2 3

crn

Z <

0

0

fl

22

./

Page 202: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,

SUBJECT 2

WEIGHT BEARING :92.2% RELIABILITY..

550 BASELINE T1 T2 POST-SESSION

4

5001

45,0

400

350

300

25() '

200

150

100

50 x

0DAY

A---a---A---&----:".&----" .......41........./.\\.. ,,,...,.W'F'PAPA' T

46.W THT WTHF WTHT T W TH F T W TH T W F T W

SESSION 2 4 6 8, 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20 1 2 3

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :94% RELIABILITY,i550

45:301

400

.350

300

250

200

150

100

BASELINE.

*

\A

T1 POST-SESSION

DAY W F TH FSESSION 1 3 5 7

T wTHT WTHF WTI1F1 3 6 8 10 11 13 18 17 20

x

T W TH F T W TH T W. F T W F

1 3 fo 8 10 11 13 18 17 20 1 2 3

CDIII00Z00

23m64)"ti0Zu) 'MS

<IMO '

CAC>rMX>"40Z

222

Page 203: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 1

BILATERAL

11

1019

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

BASELINE

REACH-GRAS! .:91% RELIABILITYT1 12 POSf-SESSION

DAY T TH T TH

SESSION 2 4 tlit 8

11

10

9

8

7

8

5

3

2

1

0

TWTHT WTHTM2 4 5 7 9 12, 14 15

WEIGHT BEARING :100% RELIABILITY

BASELINE T1

TH17 20

41161WTHF T WTHF T Y? T W TH4 5 7 9 12. 14 15 17 20 1 2 3

T1 POST-SESSION

DAYSESSION

T TH I TH1 3 5 7

, 223

T W TH T W TH I M W TH1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19

T W TH F T W TH F T W

rnCD

0 u

LIJ

T W TH ID

1 3 6 8 10 11 13. 16 18 19 1 2 3

224

Page 204: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT

WEIGHT -BEARING : 100% RELIABILITY

11 9ASELINE 11

10

9

a

7

6

5

3

2

0DAY W F PA Pi T W TH I W TH F W TH T T W TH F T W TH T W F T W

12 rOST-SESSION

to

,

SESSION 2 4 6 $ 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :93.6% RELIABILITY

11 BASELINE

10

9

2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20 1 2 3

DAY W F TH FSESSION 1 3 5 7

223

T WTH T WTH F W TH F

1 3 6 8 10 11 13 18 17 20.T W TH F T W TH T W F T W F1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20 1 2 3

.

33rn(I)-a0. zCiirn

CA

CFz0

226

Page 205: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 1

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP, :93.4% RELIABILITY

275 BASELINE

250

'225

200

175

150

125

100

75

. 50

25

0DAY

SESSION

T1T2 POST-SESS1ON

T TH T TH T,WTHT WTHT M2 4 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15

WEIGHT BEARING : 89.7% RELIABILITY

275 BASELINE

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

so

25

0DAY

12Tif

T TH T TN1 3 5 7

17

TN20

T W TH F W TH F T W T W TH2 4 S 9 12 44 15 17 20 1 2 3

T W TN T W TH T M w TH3 6 8 10 11 13 18 18 19

T WTHF T WTHFTW1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19

T W TN1 2 3

228

Page 206: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT 2 /WEIGHT BEARING : 89.2% RELIABILITY

275

250

225

200

175

150

126

7

50

25

0DAY WF MM TWTH'T riTHF WTHTSESSION 2 4 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20

BILATERAL REACH -GRASP :91.8% RELIABILITY

BASELINE T1 T 2

-4

1

POST- SESSION

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

SO

25

t

8ASELiNE

1

T1

)

T W TH F 'T W TH T W2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 18 20

-.

T1

W

1 2 3

POST. SESSION

DAY W F TH F T WTHT.WTHF WTH F T W TH F T W TH T W F T W FSESSION 1 3 5 7 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20 1 2 3

.

Page 207: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBACT

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP : 91-8% RELIABILITY

275 BASELINE T1

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

25

DAY

SESSION

WEIGHT BEARING

T 2 POSE SESSION

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

25

T TH T TH T W TH T W TH T M W TH T W TH F T W TH F T W2 4 6 8 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 17 20 2 4 5 7 9 12 14 15 17 20

:90.5% RELIABILITY

BASELINE T1 T 1

T W TH1 2 3

PosrsEssioN

4

DAY T TH To TH T WTHT WTH'TM WTH T W TH F T W TH F T W T W THSESS ION 5 7 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 2 3

2:33t 2 3 '

cocn

Page 208: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SUBJECT I

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :100% RELIABILITY

550 BASELINET2 POSTSESSION

500

450

400

350

300

250

2 00

150

100

10

0DAY

SESSION

T2

TH4

T

6

TH

8

T W

2 4

T H

5

T W7 9

T H

12

T

14

M

15

W

17

TH TWTH.F20 2 4 5 7

TWTHF9 12 14 15

TW17

T

20 1

W2

Tel

3

WEIGHT BEARING :92.8% RELIABILITY

550 BASELINE

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0.DAYSESSION

T1 T1 POST-SESSION

TTH TTH T WTHT WTHIMWTHUiT WTHF T WTHF TW T wm1 3, 57 1 368 10 11 131618 19 1 3.68 10 11 13 16 18 19 1 23

234

Page 209: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

k

SUBJECT 2

WEIGHT BEARING :84.6% RELIABILITY

275

250

225

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

BASELINE T1*

1

DAY WF MM TWTHT WTHF WTHTSESSION 2 4 8 3 2 4 S 7 9 12 14 15 18 20

BILATERAL REACH-GRASP :84.1% RELIABILITY

275

250

226

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

25

0

BASELINE T1

1

12

e

i

POST-SESSION

x

T W TN F2 4 5 7

T W TN T

9 12 14 15

T1 POST-SESSION

I1

x

DAY

SESSION

W F TH1 5 7 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20

23 ,)

F T yiTHT WTHF WTHF T WTHF T WTNT'W F1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20

T W F1 2 3

II

Page 210: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

)

el

SUBJECT 2

WEIGHT BEARING :89.1 RELIABILITY ,..

550

5061

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

501

01DAY

SESSION

BASELINE

,

T1 12

-

...

POST-SESSION

x

,..

W F M2 4 6

BILATERAL

550 BASELINE

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0DAYSESSION

M T W TH8 t 4 5

T W TH7 9 12 14 15 18 20

REACH -GRASP :93.9% RELIABILITY

F W TN T

-XtI

w TH2 4 5

F T W TH T W7 9 12 14 15 18

T1

F

20

T W F1 2 3

POST-SESSION

W F TH1 3 5 7 1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20

23 'iF T W T H T W T H F W T H F

le

T W TH F I W TH T W F T W F1 3 6 8 10 11 13 16 17 20 1 2 3

236

Page 211: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

subject 2, except that both of these responses dropped

out at the end of the experimental treatment (2) phase.

(See figures 13 and 14.)

State of Arousal

Changes in state during training with the

reach/gradp equipment were slight for subject 1, and did

not alter differentially, according to training. This

subject generally' trained inAlert Subj'ect 2,

who received only standard training with t e reach/grasp°

behavior, tended to become fussy or sleepy during

sessions on this equipment.

Changes in state during training with the

weight bearing behavior were more dynamic for both

subjects. Subject 1, who was trained using only(standard\\

procedurbs, turned from alert to crying and/or fussIng

states. Subject 2, who was trained using standard and

then experimental treatment procedures, became pro-..

47

,

gressively more drowsy toward the end of training

. C- 111.1-7tt.,

sessions (See tables 1 and 2.)4-YoA

The results of this.investigation do not suggest

that one teaching approach is far superior than the other.

Yet most motor and/or approximated motor responses

elicited under experimental treatment conditions were

maintained, providing some evidence to support the claim

that response-contingent training with learning equipment

may produce more lasting effects.

Though visual, smiling and vocal responses

did not vary with respect to treatment strategy, they

Page 212: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

STATE OF AliOUSAL

Subject 1

Wei ht BearinBaseline

----------------,InItial

,

4444

Final

4444

i

Initial

4444

Final

66

66

Treatment 1

4 4 4 6

4 4 3 6

4 4 3 6

5- .5 4 6

4 4 , 4 6

,-- 5 4 4 5/6

4 5 4 6

4/5 4/5 1 1

3 5 4/5 6

5 5 4 6/3.

ent 2 Treatmen

48

4/54/5 1

45

44

65/6

4 I4/5 4 5/6

4/5 I 5 5 4/5

5 4/5 4 5/6

1 4/5 4 4 5/6

4 5 4/5 5

4 4 4 5/6 .

4 4 4 6

4 4 4 4/5

Post Training

4/55

44

555

1

66

3

2.

Page 213: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Subjeci 2

*

STATE OF AROUSAL

Wei ht Bearin

Baseline

Initial

4344

, Bilateral Reach/Grasp

Baseline

Final

33

3

5/6

Initial

4454

Final

442

/ 4

=1yes111...Treatment 1 Treatment 1

4444 -445

3/454

3

6

45

2

3

2

3/43

3

4 3

4 4

4 4

5 4

5 5

3 4

5 4

3 2

4 4

5' 2

Treatment 2 Treatment 1

4/54ss

4/55/65

ss5

3

3

63

3

3

3

4/55/62

54/55

45

4345

4/5

245443

44/534

Post Training Post Training

5

5

3

3

2.1 ,

6 5'

49

Page 214: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

ler

may(have been more difficult to achieve on the weight

bearing equipment because of the positioning required to

perform the motor behavior. *Fussing and crying occurred almost exclusively

during weight bearing training. For subject 1, fussing

eventually began to replace crying. For subject 2, both

fussing and crying decreased together at the end of the

last treatment phase (2).

Changes inLstate may have also been influenced

by the type of apparatus in addition to 'the,training pro-

cedure. Subject I maintained alert statei under the

treatment 2 strategy on the reach/grasp equipment, while

continuing to fuss and Cry on the weight bearing equip-

ment under,standard training conditions. Subject 2,

who received only standara training on the bilateral

reach/grasp behavior, changed from alert to fussing or

sleeping states. This same subject, when weight bearing

under treatment 2 conditions, showed decreased rates of

fussing and crying by the end of the phase.

ReliabilitY

ReliabiLity was calculated across all conditions

for each subject and response, and ranged from 84.1% to

100%. (Exact figures included on graphs.). .

24 -,

Page 215: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,CH4PTER V

1.

Disdussion

Some increases in motor and/or approximated

behavior were exhibited by 'the experimental subjects '

under training in each treatment phase. The incTeases, ,

werei in most instaneVs, more substantial Under.the

contingency (treatment 2) strategies. This finding may e

either represent slight treatment effects, matAuft9I 7-110.1.

or the extra amount of practice the subjects received with

//

Y

the responses in prior training (treatment 1). Visual /

inspection of the data does, however, suggest another

difference in the effects of the two treatrnent strategies.

Generally, under treatment 1 conditions, the initial

increase in motor and/or approximation behavior was

followed by a steady decreade toward the end of the treat-

ment phase. Under the treatment 2 conditions, the

experimenter notpa an increase of approximation behavior

following prompting procedures, and, as the data confirms,

comparativeily high rates of approximated)oehavior

throughout subsequent training. (These responses were

typically maintained in post-training sessions.) Possibly,

k:44

the maintenance of responses.over treatment 2 training .

conditions was due to the subjects, continued interest in

51

243

Page 216: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

e..

activating the stimulus. If this werein faCt true, the

infants May have been actively and intentionally seeking

to repeat the action-outcome pairing. The efeort may be

interpreted as'an attempt to exercise control over

environmental phenomena. Theoretically, then, the ihfants

were engaged in a learning process, albpit in,the absence

of adequate reinforcement (approximations) fin- their

persistence. Subject 2 eventualYSr. learned to engage the

light display by employing the targeted weight bearingsr,

motor response: The same subject apparently lost interest

under continued treatment 1 conditions with the bilateral

reach/grasp equipmeht. Subject 1 did not acquire the

targeted motor behaN>idt, but did exhibit increased and

sustained approximated responses during the treatment 2

phase.

DifficultieS in ascertaining the exact causes

of discrepancies in responding under different treatment

conditions were due to both intervAing variables and

flaws in methodology that -.0ere not foreseen. They include:

11) insufficient training time

Although the training sessions lasted for

a 10 minute duration, they occurred onlyone time per day for each response. A

more efficient, and possibly productivearrangement might have entailed reducingthe treatment time and adding mord sessionsper day. This schedule may have alsoguarded a4ainst the possible countereffects produced by unreinforcedapproximation behavior and negativeresponses to the learning equipment.

2'1

.52

Page 217: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

53

4f-1'11411j1./.12) insensitivity of 1earni 1 %Ito approximated behavior

The learning equipment was unfortunately andperhaps detrimentally, insensitive toapproximated target responses. This short-coming prevented reinforcement fornear-accurate behavior, and may havecontributed to negative responses towardthe learning equipment such as fussingand crying. It may have also contributedto the changes in state resulting insleeping, possibly indicative of frustration.

3) satiating effects of light display under treat-ment 1 conditions

Light displays under treatment 1 conditions

were continual. The reinforcement for thestandard approaches consisted of tactileand auditory praise. Satiating visual'effects may have contributed to off-taskbehavior, for example, hand-gazing, andhindered motor and associated positiveresponses.

4) difference in strength of reinforcement underdifferent treatment conditions

The difference between the strength oftreatment 1 reinforcement (tactile andauditory praise) and treatment 2

(response-contingent light displays)was not controlled for, and may beresponsible for the differentialbehavior seen in training.

5) pra tice effects

The,advantage of prac ice with targetedhehav*or under treatmeh I may have con-tribute4 to accelerated responding undertreatmen't 2 conditions.

6) percussing effects (postural drainage) ofweight bearing equipment when experimentalinfants were congested

The subjects both had colds during thecourse of the investigation. The weightbearing equipment required that they bepositioned prone over a chest support.

When not weight bearing, the subjects'heads were typically postured downtoward the switch platform. This causeddrainage of congested area from upperrespiratory tract through nasal and oral

cavities.

2,4 )

Page 218: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

54

7) dislike of weight bearing equipment

Neither subject appeared to enjoy the weight

bearing equipment. No smiling occurred in

any phase for either subject, and fussingand crying responses were comparativelyhigh. It was not necessary for the sub-jects to use head control during treatment1 to be reinforced for the targeted weightbearing responzte. It was, however,required to view the continuous lightstimulus during treatment 1 and respons#1-

contingent light display during treatment

2. This added dimension, the fact thatapproximated responses were not consequated,

and the percussing effects of the equipmentwhen the subjects were congested may haveall contributed to the high incidences ofnegative behavior during weight bearingtreatment sessions.

The subjects selected for this study had both a

limited awareness of cause and effect relations4ps and an

absence of object-related schemata in their repertoire.

A more salient and perhaps successful reinforcer might have

involved response-contingent interactions with the primary

caregiver. Consideration and control of these variables

would enable isolation of experimental variables and add

clarity to the findings.

Although the generalization of responses was

not systematically probed, information gathered through

informal observations revealed that behavior acquired by

both subjects during treatment generalized into other

activities, such as home and center interactions and

independent, unstructured play situations. These effects

were mcst apparent as the result of training the bilateral

reach/grasp response. Behavior that subsequently emerged

included grasping, banging objects at midline, holding,

Page 219: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

visual inspection, and increased visual attending with

both people and objects. Additionally, it seemed

instrumental in decreasing stereotypical behavior in one

of the subjects. Weight bearing training appeared to

promote a quadraped response in subject 2, and improved

protective responses in both subjects.

For the experimental, severely handicanped

infants, contingency training offered a viable alterna-

tive to standard teaching procedures. It may haVe

additionally generated further environmental exploration,

through introducing response-contingent interactions and

the option of active participation and control.

It is evident that contingency training

utilizing learning equipment is at least a feasible

strategy for facilitating and maintaining motor skflls

and their approximations. At most, such training may

advance the understanding that an action produces an

effect. The informal observations of generalized behavior

during this investigation seem to indicate that response-

contingent training served to encourage further

exploration of the environment.

The advantages then, of motor training on

response-contingent learning equipment include increased

and sustained rates of responding, the opportunity for

active control over actions and their consequences, and./

the possibility of promoting the est6lishmeni of cause

and effect relationships. Since learning and motive-

.9-

211

55

Page 220: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

56

tion theory suggest that human growth and development is

strongly influenced by active, competent interactions

with the environment, teaching using learning equipment

may represent a progressive and time efficient supple-

ment to developmental programming for the young severely

handicapped population.

Page 221: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

57

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Accrino, S. P., & Zuromski, E. S. Simple dis.criminationlearning with sensory reinforcement by'profoundlyretarded children. A paper presented at E.P.A.,Convention, Washington, D.C., 1978.

Axelrod, S. Behavior Modification for the Classroom

Teacher. McGraw.4Hill Book Company, 1977.

Ball, T. S., Comas, T., Rugh, J., & Neptune, R.Automated range of motion training with twocerebral palsied retarded young men, MentalRetardation, .August, 1977.

Ball, T. S., McCrady,' R. E., & Hart, A. D. Automatedreinforcement of head posture in two cerebralpalsied retarded children. Perceptual and MotorSkills, 1975, 401 619-622.

Bower, T. G. R. Stimulus variables determining spaceperception in infants. Science, 1965, 3712,

323-324.

Bower, T. G. R. The visual world of infants. ScienificAmerican, 1966, 215 (6), 80-92.

Brazelton, T. B. Neonatal Behavioral Assessment Scale.

Spastics International Medical Publications, 1973.

Brazelton, T., Scholl, M., &.Robey, J. Visual responses

in the newborn. Pediatrics, 1966, 37, 284-290.

Bricker, D., Dennison, L., and Bricker, W. A LanguageIntervention Proram for Developmentally Youdg

Children. A monograph. University of Miami,

YUYIENJr, 1976.

Campbell, P. H Green, K. M., & Carlson, L. M.Approximating the norm through environmental and

child-centered prosthetics and adaptive equipment.

In E. Sontag, Ed. Ecit.orialEnmin.forthsprofouiidly of

Mental Retardation, Council for ExceptionalChildren, 1977.

24

Page 222: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

58

Caron, R. F., Caron, A.' J., & Caldwell, R. C. Satiation

of visual reinforcement in young infants.

laP24.10MIJILIZE.Z0121912Y,1971, Vol. 5, No. 2,

279-289.

Conner, F. P., Williamson, G. G., and Siepp, J. M.

ProsrarnalicleforlaantsancroddlerswithTeachers College Press, Teachers College, Columbia

University, New York and London, 1978.

Dayton, G, O., Jr., Jones, M. H., Steele, B., & Rose, M.

Developmental study of coordinated eye movements cn

the human infant (Sedtion II). AMA Archives ofOphthalmology, 1964, 71, 820-875.

Desor, J. A., Mailer, O., & Turner, R. E. Taste

acceptance of sugars by human infants. Journal of

Comparative and Physioloalcallsychology, 1973;

84, 496-501.

Eisenberg, R. B. The organization of auditory behaviors.

Journal of Speech and Hearing Research. 1970, 13,

453-471.

Eugen, T., Lipsitt, L. P., & Peck, M. B. Ability of

newborn infants to discriminate sapid substances.

amloakentalpsycholoa, 1974, 10, 741-744.

Fagen, J. W., & Rovee, C. K. Effects of quantitative

shifts in a visual reinforcer on the instrumental

response of infants. Journal of Ex erimental Child

Psxchology, 1976, 21, 349-36 .

Fitzgerald, H. E., Brackbill, Y. Classical conditioning

in infancy: Development and Constraints.

Psychological Bulletin, 1976, 83, 376-383.

Frederickst H. D. B., Riggs, C., Furey; T., Grove', D.,

Moore, W., McDonnell, J., Jordan, E., Hanson, W.,

Baldwin, V., Wadlow, M. The.Teaching Research -

Curriculum for ModeratelanaledFa.Charles C. Thomas Publisher, Sprinfie1d, 1114, 1976.

Friedlander, B. Z., Kamin, P., & Hesse, G. W. Operant

therapy for prehension disabilities in moderately and

severely retarded young children. The Training

School Bulletin, 1974, 71, 101-108.

Goldberg, S. Social competence in infancy, A model of

parent-infant interaction. Merrill-Palmer

Quarterly, 1977, 23, No. 3, 163-177.

Page 223: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

59

Guess, D., Horner, R. D., Utley, B., Holvoet, J.,

Maxon,1)., Tucker, D., Warren, S. A functional

curriculum sequencing model for teaching the

severely handidapped. AAESPH Review, December,

1978, 202-215.

Guess, D., Sailor, W., & Baer, D. M. FunctionalS.eech and Lan ua e Trainine for the SeVerel

Hanicapped. H. H. Enterprises, Inc., 197

Lawrence, Ka.

Hanson, M.A Guide tor Parents, University Park Press,

Baltimore, Md., 1977.

Hanson, M. J.,and Bellamy, G. T. Continuous measure-

ment of progress in infant programs. Education

and Training of the Mentally Retarded, 1977,

12, 52-58.

Haring, N. G. Measurement and evaluation procedures for

programming with the severely and profoundly

handicapped. In Educational Programming for the

Severely and Profoundly Handicapped. Ed Sontag,

Ed., 1977. Division on 'Mental Health.

Harlow, H. F. The nature of love. American Psychologist,

1958, 13, 673-685.

Harlow, H. F.., & Harlow, M. K. The affectional systems.

In Schrier, H. F. Harlow, & F. Stolinitz, Eds.

Behavior of Nonhuman Primates, Vol. 2, New York

Academic Press, 1965.

Harlow, H. F., & Zimmermann, R. R. Affectional responses

inthe infant monkey, Science, 1959, 130, 421-432.

Haynes, H., White, B. L., & Held, R. M. Visual

accommodation in human infants. Science, 1965,

148, 528-530.

Hebb, D. O. Or anization of Behavior New York

Wiley, 1949.

Hersen, M., and Barlow, D. H. Single Case Experimental

Desi s: Strategies for Stud in Behavior Chan e

Pergamon Press, 1976.

*Hulsebus, R. C. Operant conditioning in infant behavior,

A review. In H. W. Reese, Ed. Advances in Child

Development and Behavior. New York Academic Press,

Vol. 8.

25

Page 224: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

,60

Jennings, K. D., Harmon . J., Morgan, G. A., Gaiter,J. L., and Yarrow, I. J. Exploratory play as anindex of mastery motivation, relationships topersistence, cognitive functioning, and environ-mental measures. Developmental Psychology, 1979,Vol. 15, No. 4, 386-394.

Kagan, Jerome. The determinants of attention in theinfant. L. J. Stone, H. T. Smith, and L. B. Murphy, Eds.The Competent Infant: Researclamentar.Basic Books, Inc., Publishers, New York, 1973.

Kasari, C., and Filler, J. Using inflatables withseverely motorically involved infants and pre-schoolers. Teaching Exce tional Children,Sept. 1981, 22-26.

Kauffman, J. M., & Snell, Martha E. Managing the-behaviorof severely handicapped persons. In Educational ,

Programming for the Severely and ProfoundlyHandicap.221. Ed Sontag, Ed., 1977, Division onMental Health.

Kazdin, A. E. Behavior Modification in'Applied Settings.The Dorsey Press, 1975.

,

Lewis, M., & Goldberg, S. Perceptual-cognitive develop-ment in infancy; A generalized expectancy model asa function of the mother-infant interaction.Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, Vol. 15,- 1969, 81-100.

Lewis, q., Goldberg, S., & Rausch, M. Attention distri-bution as a function of novelty and familiarity.pastonom-Sci., 1967, 7, 227-228.

Maier, R. F. Frustration; The Study_ of Behavior Withouta Goal. University of Michigan Press, 1949.

McCall, R. B. Infant,s, Howard University Press, Cambridge,Massachusetts,.London, England, 1979.

Millar, W. A. Social reinforcement of a manipulativeresponse in six-and nine-month-old infants.Journal of Child Psychological Psychiatry, Vol. 17,1976, 205-212,1Pergamon Press, Printed in GreatBritain.

Murphy, R. J., & Doughty, N. R. Establishment of con-trolled arm movements in profoundly retardedstudents using response-contingent vibratorystimulation. American Journal of Mental Deficienc1977, 82, 116. 2, 212-216.

a

.

-

Page 225: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

61

Nisbetti,R. E., & Gurwitz, S. B. Weight, sex and thehearing behavior of human newborns. Journal of

1970,

73 24 -2 3.-k%Aget, J. zneLcali.g1_..isofnAi.erm Translated by

M. Cook, New York: International University Press,1952.

Prescott, J. W. Somatosensory deprivation and its'-'

relationship to-the blind. In Z. S. Jastrze ska,

Ed. The Effects of Blindness and Other Impai1rments

on Early Development. The American Foun ation forthe Blind, New York, 1976.

Provence, S., & Lipton, R. C. Ihfants In Institutions.International Universities Press, Inc., New York,

1962.

Ramey, C. T., & Ourth, L. L. Delayed reinforcement andvocalization rates of infants. Child Development,

1971, 42,,291-297.

Reese, H. W., and Lipsitt, L. P. Experimental Childysychology, New York Academic Press, 1970.

Rovee, C. K., &,Rovee, D. T. Conjugate reinforcement ofinfant exploration behavior. Journal of ExzerimentalChild Psychology, 1969, 8, 33-39.

Sameroff, A. J., & Cavanaugh, P. J. Learning in infancy;

A developmental perspective. In J. D. Osofsky, Ed.Handbook of Infant Development. A Wiley Interscience

Publication, 1979.

Schaffer, H. R. Early interaction development. In H. R.

Schaffer, Ed. Mother-Infant Interaction. University

of Strathclyde, Glascow, Scotland, 1977, Academic

Press.

Seligman, M. Hel lessness: On devepmentdeath. San Franc sco, W. H. Freeman, 3.975.

Sheppard, W. C. Operant control of infant vocal and

motor behavior. Journal of Experimental Child

Psychology, 1969, 7, 36-51.

Sherrod,'K., Vietze, P., & Friedman, S. 'Infancy, Brooks/

Cole Publishing Company, Monterey, California, 1978.

Siqueland, E. R., & Lipsitt, L. P. Conditioned head-

turning in human newborns. gRIE111_2E_Rufs_inEatAl

cni2_.EuLszst_gxlcao,1966, 3, 356-376.

Page 226: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Snell, M. E. & Smith, D. D. Intervention strategies.In,SystLatic Instruction of Moderately and SeverelHanaicapped. M. E. Snell, E Charles E. MerrillPublishing Co., 1978.

Sokolov, Ye. N. Perception and' the Conditioned Reflex.New York, Macmillan Co. (S. W. Waydenfeld, Trans.),1963.

Solkoff, N., & Cotton, C. Cont.,agency awareness in pre-

mature infants. pis.._IMot_2rSLPercetualaxills;-

1975, 41, 709-710.

Stern, E., & Jeffrey, W. E. 0perant conditioning of non-nutritive sucking in the.neonate. Paper presentedat Society Research Child Development. Minneapolis,

March, 1965.

Suomi, S. J., & Harlow, H. F. Abrormal social behavior

in young monkeys. In J. Hellinuth, Ed., Exceptional

Infant Studies in Abnormalities. Brunne'r/Mazel,

Publisher, 1971.

Thoman, E..B. Changing of views of the being and

becoming of infants. In Origins of the InfantsSocial Res onsiveness. E. B. Thoman, Ed.,Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers, 1979,Hillsdale, New Jersey.

Warren, D. H. InindnessandEarloodDeveloment.American FOundationforth1977.

Watson, J. S. Memory and "contingency analysis" in infant

learning. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 1967, 13, 55-76.

Watson, J. S. Perception of contingency as a determinant

of social responsiveness. In Origins of the Infant's

Social Responsiveness. E. B. Thoman, Ed., LawrenceErlbaum Associates, Publishers, 1979.

Watson, J. S. Smiling, cooing and the "game". Merrill-

Palmer Quarterly, 1972, 18, 323-339.

Watson, J. S. The development and generalization and"contingency awareness" in early infancy: some

hypotheses. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 1966, 12,

123-135.

Watson, J. S., & Ramey, C. T. Reactions to,response-contingent-stimulation in early infancy. Merrill-

Palmer Quarterly, 1972, 18, 219-227.

231

Page 227: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

63

Wenar, C. Competence at one. lier_ser2x.izarterl,1964, 10, 329-342.

Wertheim, E. S. Person-environment interaction: the

epigenesis of autonomy and competency. II Review

of developmental literature (normal development).

British Journal of Medical Psychology, 1975, 48,

95-111, Printed Lii Great Britain.

White, 0. R., Edgar, E., and Haring, V. G. UniformPerformance Assessment System. UniversTETTOT-Washington, 1978.

White, 0. R., & Haring, N. G. aseetiorJA_.teas,t_n:a multimedia training package. Charles E. Merrill

Publishing Company, Columbus, Ohio, 1976.

White, R. W. Motivation reconsidered, The concept of

competence. Psychological Review, Vol. 66, No. 5,

1959, 297-333.

Wolff, P. H. The causes, controls, and organization of

behavior in the neonate. Psychological Issues,

Vol. V. No. I, Monograph 17. International

UrTNTEsities Press, Inc., New York, 1966.

Zuromski, E. S., Smith, N. F.,& Brown, R. The simple

electromechanical response device for multiply

handicapped infants. A paper presented at A.P.A.

Convention, San Francisco, California, 1977.

25

Page 228: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

r)

APPENDICES.

1. Parental Consent Form

2. Diagram of Classroom

3. Brazelton's States (Aapted)

4. Pilot Procedures

S. Pretest Procedures

6. Treatment 1 Procedures

7. Treatment 2 Procedures

8. Diagrams of Learning Equipment:Weight BearingWeight Bearing WiringBilateral Reach/GraspBilateral Reach/Grasp Wiring

25

Page 229: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I

r

A

Parental Consent Form

25 I

,

,

t

6 5

Page 230: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Parent Permission Form

Research Project: Teaching Motor Responses to Multi-Handicapped Infants Using Learning

Devices

I am aware that the purpose of this investigation is to

compare the teaching method presently used in the class-

room and in myhome with a new strategy employing simple

,contingency devices.

I agree that the particular motor responses to be trained

are not presently in my child's repertoire and I see the

relevance of these behaviors in ray child's developmental

progression,

I -understand that all records will be subject to the same

standards of confidentiality as the other records'in the

project, that real naipeg will not be used, and that video-

tapes will be viewed only by the research personnel

particiitating in this project and then destroyed after a

one year period.

I will permit my child to be transported in a private car

to and from school for the training sessions.

I realize that I am free not to participate in this pro-

ject, and that if I agree, I have the option' of

withdrawing my child at any time.

Child's Name Parent's Signature

Parent's Slgnature)

Date

.66

Page 231: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

67

Diagram of Classroom

Page 232: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

0

WEST

Mirror

MATS

LMotorEquip.

Refrig.

File Desk

Desk File

Camera

01

0rO

rtain

VideoEquip.

Black Curtain

CARPETEDAREA

%TM "NT411OXII.

EAST

2 t )

0

68

Page 233: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

69

Brazeiton's States (Adapted)

-

Page 234: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

70

Coding State of Arousal: (T. Berry Brazelton Neonatal_Behavioral Assessment Scale1976).

States of Arousal:

Awake States:

3. Drowsy or semi-dozing: Eyes may be open or closed,

eyelids flutteridg; activity level variable, withinterspersed, mild startles from time to time;reactive to sensory stimuli, but response oftendelayed; state change after stimulation frequentlynoted, movements are visually smooth. Fussing may

or may not be present.

4: Alert, with bright look; seems to focus attention on

source of stimulation, such as an object to be sucked,

or a visual or auditory stimulus; impinging stimuli

may break through, but with some delay in response.

Mknimal motor activity.

5. Eyes open; considerable motor activity, with thrusting

movements of the extremities, and even a few spon-

taneous startles; reactive to external stimulationwith increase in startles or motor activity, butdiscrete reactions difficult to distinguish because

of high activity level. Fussing may or may not be

present.

6. Cr in : Characterized by intense crying which is,

icult to break through with-stimulation.

Sleep States:

1. Deep sleep with regular breathing, eyes closed, no

spontaneous activity except startles or jerky move-

ments at quite regular intervals: external stimuli

produce startles with some delay; ,Ippression of

startles is rapid, and state changti are less likely

than from other states. No eye movements.

2. Li ht sleep with e es closed; rapid eye movements canbe observed un er c ose s; low activity level,

with random movements and startles or startle equiva-

lent; movements are likely to be smoother and moremonitored than in deep sleep; responds to internal

and external stimuli with startle equivalents, often

with a resulting change of state. Respirations are

irregular, sucking movements occur off and on.

21;

Page 235: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

0

Pilot P /cedures

71

Page 236: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME: DATE: PROGRAMMER: Veltman

AREA: Gross Motor PHASE: Reach/Grasp STEP: Bilateral

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will, when positioned in a supported sit facing the

apparatus reach towards and grasp steering wheel (one hand on either side) in

bilateral:mmtmata_CRITERION:

MATERIALS

Learning,equipment

PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE CONSEQUATION SCORING

POSITION OFCHILD

Supportedsitting incarrier

21;

(1) Connect contingentdisplay

(2) Padding behindshoulders tofacilitate reach

(3) Initial 3 secondfull hand prompt

(1) Subject graspssteering wheelbilaterallyone hand oneither side

(2) No'or incorrectresponse with-in 1 minutetime period

(3) No or incorrectresponsefollowingsecond prompt

(1) Contingent (1) Record fre-light quency ofdisplay response

(2) Full handpromptlasting 3seconds

(3) None

' 6

Page 237: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Pilot

DATE:.NAME:PROGRAMMER:, Veltman

AREA: Gross Motor PHASE: Weight Dearingawm, STEP: Extended Arms.

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will bear equal weight on extended arms while in a

prone position partially supported at chest

CRITERION:

MATERIALS PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPEdTED RESPONSE

Learning-equipment

POSITION OFCHILD

Pronechest sup-ported byrollSeat beltfastenedaroundwaist

2f; ,

(1) Connect contingentvisual display

(2) Position subject

(3) Administer initial3 second shoulderprompt

(1) Subject bearsweight onextended arms

(2) Subject doesnot respond orrespondsincorrectlywithin 1 minute

(3) Subject doesnot respond orrespondsincorrectly

CONSEQUATION SCORING

(1) Contingentlightdisplay

(1) Record dura-tion ofresponse

(2) Repeat 3secondshoulderprompt

(3) None

2f;

Page 238: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

74

Pretest Procedures

Page 239: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME: DATE:

AREA: Gross Motor

=,PHASE: Reach/Grasp

Pretest

PROGRAMMER: Veltman

STEP: Bilateral

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will, when positioned in a supported sit facing the

apparatus reach towards and grasp steering wheel (one hand on either side) in

CRITERION:

MATERIALS PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE CONSEQUATION SCORING

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

Supportedsitting incarriet

2f;

(1) Noncontingentvisual display(continuous dis-,play) causeaTiiolding circuitlosed on device

with clamps

(2) Padding to facili-tate reach - behindelbows, shoulders

(3) Full hand promptfor 3 second dura-tion

(1) Bilateralreach/graspto steeringwheel

(2) No or in-appropriateresponse after1 minute

(3) No response orincorrect re-sponse aftersecond handprompt

(1) None

(2) Secondhandprompt ,

lasting 3seconds

(3) None

(1) Score byobservationor number ofbilateralreach/graspresponses towheel

2

Page 240: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Ira NAME: 4DATE:

r---Pretest ----1

AREA: Gross Motor PHASEf Weight Bearing

PROGRAMMER: Veltman

STEP: Extended Arms

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Stpoject will bear equal weight on extended arms while in a

prone position partial/y supported at chest*

CRITERION:

MATERIALS PREPARATerRY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE CONSEQUATION SCORING

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

ProneChest sup-ported byrollSeat beltholdingaroundwaist

I )1

(1) Noncontingentvisual display(lights on)

4.

(2) Connect lightindicator to sig-nal response atrear of device

(3) Administer initial3 second shoulderprompt, holdingelbows extended

(1) Subject bearsweight onextended arms

(2) Subject doesnot bearweight orequal weighton extendedarms within 1minute

(3) No or inco-rrect responsafter secondshoulderprompt

(1) None

(2) Administersecond 3secondshoulderprompt

(3) None

(1) Record dura-tion ofresponse asindicated bylight at rearof device

11

Page 241: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

77

Treatment 1 Procedures

f) -1/..... / .)

Page 242: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME:

AREA: GroEs Motor

DATE:PROGRAMMER: VeltmanftWa

PHASE: Reach/Grasp STEP: Bilateral

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will, when positioned in a supported sit facing the

apparatus, reach towards and grasp steering wheel (one hand on either side) in

1Watezzl_maltumaata 4NMIOam.awsswNimw*wwm1V1...IsVS.OfxaawrwImMewll/aaMNwwmmmmmw.rm.w

CRITERION: , .....10.10MIIIINE

MATERIALS PREPARATORY PROCEDURES

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

Im. awarml

Supportedsitting incarrier

(1) Child is seated,supported at hipswith strap

(2) Flexors on insideof forearm aretapped 3 timesapiece

(3) Fingers are givenquick stretch 1

time on each palm-

up hand(4) Dowels are pre-

sented horizontallyrequiring child tograsp (handprompt) or fallback (press chest)

a) palm-up 3 times

b) palm-down 3

times(5) Non-contingent

light disllay

EXPECTED RESPONSE

(1) Subject graspssteering wheelone hand oreither side ina bilateralmovement

(2) Subject doesnot respond orrespondsincorrectlywithin 1minute period

(3) Subject doesnot respond orrespondsincorrectly

wwag-,.1111010

111..0.15

(1) Praise,verbal reinforce-ment

(2) Administersecondfull handpromptfor 3secondduration

SCORING

(1) Count fre-quently ofbilateralgrasps onsteeringwheel

27)

Page 243: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME:

AREA: Gross Motor

Treatment 1

DATE: PROGRAMMER: Veltman

PHASE: Weight Bearing STEP: Extended Arms

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will bear equal weight on extended arms while in a

prone position partially supported at chest

CRITERION:

MATERIALS PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE CONSEQUATION SCORING

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

ProneChest sup-ported byroll

Seat beltfastenedaroundwaist

a)

(1) Position subjecton forearms inprone position

(2) Pull hips upwardsand backwards oneither side untilsubject assumesa quadrapedposition

(3) Hold for 3 seconds(4) Lower hips(5) Extend arms and

apply pressure toshoulders for 3seconds

(6) Position on learn-ing apparatus

,.

(7) Connect noncontin-gent light display

(8) Administer initial3 second shoulderprompt

(1) Subject bearsweight onextended arms

(2) Subject doesnot respond orresponds in-correctlywithin a 1minute timeperiod

(3) Subject doesnot respondor respondsincorrectly

(1) Praise -verbalreinforce-ment

(2) Administersecond 3,secondshoulderprompt

(3) None

(1) Record dura-tion ofresponse asindicatedby light atrear ofdevice

27 (

Page 244: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Treatment 2 Procedures

2 7 :')

%

80

Page 245: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME: DATE:

AREA: Gross Motor

PROGRAMMER: Veltman

PHASE: Reach/Grasp STEP: Bilateral

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subject will, when positioneci-17MarigEFEWirfaValapparatus, reach towards and grasp steering wheel (one hand on either side) in

bilateral movements

CRITERION:

MATERIALS

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

Supportedsitting incarrier

27.)

111PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE

(1) Test contingentvisual display

(2) Padding behindsubjects, shoulderand elbows tofacilitate reach

(3) Initial 3 secondfull hand prompt

(1) Subject graspssteering wheelbilatArally,one hand oneither side

No or incorrectresponse with-in 1 minutetime period

No or incorrectreqponsefollowingsecond handprompt

CONSEQUATION SCORING

(1) Contingentlight dis-play

(1) Record fre-quency ofresponse bycountingoccurrenceof display

(2) Full handprompt for3 secondduration

(3) None

26J

Page 246: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

NAME: DATE:

Treatment 2

PROGRAMMER: Veltman

AREA: Gross Motor PHASE: Weight Bearing STEP: Extended Arms

BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE: Subjent will bear eaual weight oh extended arms while in aprone position partially supported at chest

CRITERION:

MATERIALS PREPARATORY PROCEDURES EXPECTED RESPONSE

Learningequipment

POSITION OFCHILD

proneChest sup7ported byrollSeat beltfastenedaroundwaist

261

(1) Connect contingentvisual display

(2) Position subject

(3) Administer initial3 second shoulderprompt

(1) Subject bearsweight onextended arms

(2) Subject eitherdoes not re-spond orresponds in-correctlywithin Iminute

(3) Subject eitherdoes not re-spond orresponds in-correctly

CONSEQUATION SCORING

(1) Contingentlight dis-play

(1) Record dura-tion ofresponse

(2) Repeat 3secondshoulderprompi

(3) None

2S.

Page 247: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

P

Diagrams of Learning Equipment:

Weight BearingWeight Bearing WiringBilateral Reach/GraspBilateral Reach/Grasp Wiring

283

o

9

83

Page 248: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

.-- 45' " ---->

7.0.T.NWEIGHT BEARING EQUIPMENT

2 b 1

1---, / a 0...............

DESIGNED BY:Margaret VeltmanGerald M. Simmons.

ADAPTATIONS:Kelly Edmundson

2 6 )

Page 249: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

SelectorSwitch

1 2 . 3

Plug

Note/

PressureSwitches

Both Pressure SwitchesHaVe To Be Activatedkor Light Circuits/Power To Operate.

NoConnections

Child'sLight

Forwardeache

tir Ligh

WEIGHT BEARING WIRING

jforward) 1.

.(center)

Child's lighton.continuously

2. Child's lightoff-

qild's lightAih withpressure sliitch

actiVated

(rearward) 3.

Note: Teacher's light wi4.always light when-ever pressureswitchesare activated

co

Page 250: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Front

BILATERAL REACH/GRASP EQUIPMENT

BUILT BY:Margaret VeltmanGerald M, Simmons

J

4,4

gdapter4:10(Reduces Voltage) ,)

Page 251: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

t.

v

,.

\

aFlashlights

andReflector

a

w

,

, #

COnnector

87

Wire 'Switch onSteering Wheel

Adaitor

BILATERAL REACH/GRASP WIRING.

e

'7 :

\

Page 252: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

I.

Appendi x F

El ectroni c Apparatus

2 t

4.

1

Page 253: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

PUZZLE TOY

DESCRIPTION

This puzzle id designed to reward the child with a

seven second burst of lights and sound when he places the

two pieces,in correctly. After the Seven second reinforce-

ment, the child must reMove both pieces and reinstall them

"4\4efore the lights and bell will sound again.\

The piecei-Vill be colored acrylic plastid'about 3"X6" in

size. One will have 'ankular edges, the other will have'rounded

edges . Both pieces will. be a. i" higher than the holes.

The batteries, bell, and control circuits will be housed

in the case as shown above. The case will be made of plywood

and should be strong enough to survive normal kicking around..

Page 254: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4

PROPOSED PARTS LIST

FOR PUZZLE TOY

Electrical ,

8 ktD" cell bactteries (alkaline).

2 battery cases (each 'holds four)

sensitiv.SPDT r4ay.

4200 MFD .Capacitor

1 q, watt intensity Lite bulbs

AutoMbtive turn signal flasher

2 Single pole:, double throw switches

Bell or Buzzer (12 Volt)

'Case Materials

.4.

$9.96

2.58

c\-.. 1.99

3.49,

7.00

4.00

(micro) . 2.68

8.00art/

smaliambunts of colored plastic \

for-lamp lenses and pieces 5.00

plyWood for case 2.00

miss, screws and othen fasteners 3.00

Paint and Finish 3.00 I

TOTAL 52.70Material

Labor t hours at $10.00 . $14.o.00

Total Estimated

Cost: $92.70

0

29 j

Page 255: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

tamBbDY PARTS

DOLL TOY

This, toy will be used by an instructor to teach a chiad

"to recOgnize'parts of the body. In the Simple version,

it will cOnsist of a cartoon child made out of translucent

colored sheet plastic mounted on a light box. The instructor

can.control the light with a'hand held switch,. The'child

be asked to point to the cartoon's "hand". If the child

points correctly, (the instructor will push the button switch

and light up the entire 'doll.

Deluxe versiont In this'version each part of the doll will

-have its own light. For exampli, when the child points to

the cartoods head, just the head will-light up. This dedign

requires alight bulb for each part of the body and a 'switCh

for.each light bulb on the instructor's control box. It also

requires that'the light box have partitions Wilt into it to

keep light from Spilling over into unwanted areas.. A 20

body Part model is priced on the.next pge.

to StiAna

blboa CP. tieCcriNee rs

erat tr.2 9 4

Page 256: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

PROPOSED PARTSiLIST

FOR BODY PARTS DOLL

(SIMPLE VERSION)

Electrical

4."D" cells forpower supply

1 battery holder,.

(1) 6 volt light bulb

push button switch

1 hand-held cóntrOl box-

Case material

$4.98

$1.29

.79

2.00

1.89

4 io 5 sq ft of colored plastica $15.00

plywood for case . 3.00

miss screws and fasteners . 3.00

paint and finish , 3.00

TOTAL $34.95

Material

Labor 6 hours at $10.00/hotir 60.00

,1

Total Estimated

_Costs $94.95

29.)

Page 257: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

PiOPOSED PARTS LIST

FOR BODY PARTS DOLL

DELUXE VERSION)

Electrical

11.

cr

.4 "D" cells for power supply $4.98

1 Battery,holder 1.29

(1) hand held control box 1.89

20 Micro push button switches 9.96

Ribbon cable 20 strand-48" long 18.00

(206 volt light bulbs

20 light bulb so.ckets 6.00

Ask

Case.matei:ials

4 to 5 sq ft bf colored plastic $15.60

plywood for case 3.00

miss. screws and fasteners 3.00

paint and finish 3.00.

Total $74.02Material

Labor. 10 hours at $10.00/hour c-$100.00

Total Estimated

COST: $174.00

Page 258: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

4/

//1444L.A.-

ENbiCHECK, MONEY-ORDER, OR

P RCHASE ORDER.TO:

ITEM QTY PRICE TOTAL

2 PRESSURE swrTtH $24.50-

Linda J. Burkhart

8315 Potomac Ave.HEAD CONTizOL SWITCH )6:95

College Park, MD -20740 TOY ADAPTER D CELL 6.95

PLEASE PRINT C CELL' 6.95 .4.

AA CELL , 6.95

NAME9 VOLT

STREET ANY 4 ADAPTERS 4 24.95

BOOK6.00

CITYSTATE ZIP

MO residents add 5%

sales tax t 1

TOTAL

TOY ADAPTER - Thisjoy adapter will fit either of theswitches-described as well as tlie ones.

that you make yourself from the.book described below. SimpTy slide the edapter between the

batteries' of the toy and plug the switch into it% The-toy adapter may be reused for any toyk

the same size batteries.Select toys that have an ON/OFF switch. Complete direttions are

tncluded. Please specify battery size. When electing a remote controlled toy, make sure th,

there is an ON/OFF switch on the control and buy the adapter to fit the size batteries in fhe

control. The sWitch will not be able to control other functions besides ON and OFF. Price

includes postage and tiandling. Sizes: 0, and AA ce11,5 $6.95

NOTE: The 9 volt adapter requiresabout one extra half nche of spaCe in the battery compart

ment. Examine the toy or:radio'before purchasing. Prince includes postage and handling.

Size: 9 volt . . ... $7.95

VAKE YOUR own! - This book describes how to make siMple switches'and toyadaptations easily a

inexpensively. It gNes complete instruction'sand clear

illustrations as well as suggested u

and activities. Price includes postage and handling. HomemadeBattery.Powered To s and

-Educational Devices for Severety Handicapped Children, by Linda J. Burkhart $6.00

OSSB LOW VISION EVALUATION TOOL

p 3

Thefollowing is a tool devised by three visionspecialists from the Oregon State Schoolfor

Blind: Beppie Hello, Patty Troisi, and Debbie Oppel. It was devised in a joint effort to

facilitate a consistedt,ongoingNethod of evaluating both students.at the Sch000r the Bl

and Oreschoolchildren in the home. The information is recorded ip a developmental sequence.

The informationplaced on this evaluation.can then be shared with other educationalprofessior

and opthalmologists/optometristsin efforts to provide a total-child education.

This tool can also be used'as a criterion reference test in that a vision stimulation prograr

be devised for children in the areas they are lacking.orshowing "Low level of performance.

This tool has already beenimplemented at OSSB and has pi-oven to be successful in giving an

organized profile of each student's visual functioning. We hope it will be useful to ybu.

29

Page 259: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Appendix G

San Francisco Infant Program

Student Training Manual

Page 260: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

TRAINEES INFORMATION SHEET

To assist trai.nees of various disciplines in jpining the staff of theSan Francisco Infant Program, some basic information is necessary. Please fill

out the enclos'ed form and give it to the cooperating teacher/therapist you areassigned to work with.:

NAME:

PRESENT ADDRESS: PRESENT PHONE:

PERMANENT ADDRESS: PHONE:

DISCIPLINE: (Teaching, PT, etc.):

College/University currently attending:

Student Program level (e.g. graduate, intern, affiliate, underoraduate, etc.):

Dates of Student Placement: To

.Days/Hours to b'e_spent in School:

Previous Trai.ning Placement (with short description of population and nature of

your involvement:

Are there University evaluation forms to be filled out on you?Yes No

If so, who is responsible for thiS?

Who is your student teaching supervisor?

- What competehcies do you hope to gain frop this experience?

List your strengths and weakness as you see them.

0

In case of emergencies, who should we contact?

Page 261: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

The San Francisco li-ant Program

The primary goal of the San Francisco Infant Program is to provide early

intervention services to young handicapped and developmentally delayed infants

and toddlers and their families. The philosophy of the program is based on a

behavioral approach to education, as well as a developmental approach.

The San Francisco Infant Program is designed to provide field experience

auitraining for students from the disciplines of early childhood and special

education, occupational and physical therapy, psychology and social work \

Students will be given the opportunity to work with a transdiscipTinai-y team,

participating and observing various disciplines,working together and sharing

expertisb in providing services to individual chilaren. In addition, various

research projects will be carried out in the classroom. Staff members and ,

students will have the opportunity to be involved in these research projects.

Page 262: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Introduction to the San Francisco Infant Program

The San.Francisco Infant 'Program is a service to inflapts and their faMilies

provided in the school district. It is operated 'from a federal grant awarded

to San FrancisCo State University. The program is located at Sunshine School

and serves infants from birth to 18 months and toddlers 18-36 months. The

program provides educational services for each child in all areas of develop-

ment, including fine and gross motor skills, cognitive.and pre-academic skills,

communication and social and self-help skills.

Ten infants and their parents or caregivdrs come to the classroom one day

a deek for three hours. ParentS and teachers plan educational programs for

each child during classroomctime. Parents also work on the programs and

activities at home.

Twelve toddlers, two of whom are non-handicapped peer models, Atend

school three mornings a week for three hours each session. Parents/caregivers

are asked to participate in the program two out of the three mornings. They

also provide home programs and activitei's to their child.

In addition to attending class with their child, parents have the oppor-

tunity to participate in a parent group bi-weekly. Home visits to each

family are also thine on a regular basis.,

San Francisco Infant Program Staff Mpmbers:

Marci Hanson 7 Project Director

Pat Landman Parent Coordinator

Joan LaPoint - Educational Coordinator

Eve Cheung - Head Teacher

Karin Simpson-Schubert - Physical Therapist

Humberto Sale - Spanish Interpretor

Page 263: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

MONDAY

,sb

PROGRAM SCHEDUCE'

TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY FRIDAY

AM

Toddler

9:00

12:00

PM

Infant

Group B

9:06 -

12:00

Toddier

9:00

12:00

'Toddler

9:00,

12:00

Planning &ReportWriting;

Inservices;'

IndividuilEvaluations

Home Visits

IndividualTherapy

StaffMeeting

(1:00-4:00)

'Staffing

Inservice

Infant

Group A

12:30 -

3:30

Home Visits

IndividualTherapy'

Toddler Class Schedule

9:00 - 9:10 Arrival; Undressing

'9:10 - 9:30 Opiening

9:30 - 9:45 Small Group

9:45 10:05 Small Group

10:05 10:25 Gross Motor/Large Group Activity

10:25 10:50 Snacks

10:50 11:10 Small Group

11:10 11:25 Small Group

11:25 - 11:40 Large Group Activity/Free Play-

11:40 11:50 Closing; bressing

302

0

Page 264: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Responsibili ties of Student Teacher

1. Assist in n'organization of classroom

2. Assist in n planning and implementing small and large group activities.

3. Assist in '1 planning and implementing individual student programs.

4. Assist in -i data collection in classroom and graphing of data.

5. Preparat2, ion oY 'classcoom for next day:

a) Cl ,oard systpm

b) Physi 'cal set-up

c)- Teach .ing materials needed

6. Participa te in trarisdiscipl inary team, eg,i1 follow-through on positioning

and liandl ing recommendations made by Physical Therapist.

7. Assist in Parent straining.

8. Participa te in home visits, 1EP meetings, Evaluation_ segsions, staffings,

9. Attend participate in, staff meetings.an-li

10. Develop t. eaching materials for-the classroom.

Page 265: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

e.

General Objectives of Student Teaching,Practicum

Through the student*teaching experience, students will demonstrate

knowledge of:

A. Classroom management and classroom engineering skills for an

early childIpbd class

1) behavior management skills

2) classroom arrangement 4'

3) apvopriate placement of children in a group activity

4) management of chilqren in'a small or large. group

5) grouping children actording to funCtional'levels; behavioral

levels.

B. Development of instructional obejctives and curridulum in selected areas

of early childhood education

1) assessment,procedures

2) data systems

3) 'appropriate materials

4) .appropriate teaching procedures

C. Basic teaching and presentation skills appropriate for an early

childhood clasroom

1) Classroom dynamics/presentation skills.

For exampTe:

a), facial and ohysical gestddes

b). vocal presentation during various activities

c) motivating a group for activity

Teaciping proced4res.

For example:'

a) task preparation and arrangement

b) prompting (verbal and physical) and modeling

c) giving concise directions, and other.cues .

d) evaluation of activity while teaching as well as

after activity is done.

30i

Page 266: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

e) preparation and implementation of small ,and large

group acti viti es

reinfqrcement techniques

_other relevant teaching techniques.

D. Participation in a transdisciplinary team.

E. Interactions wi th pa'rents

For exampl e:

1) on home visits

2) setting up instructional prov(ns

3) giving suggestions

4) in parent group meetings

30:3

Page 267: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Weekly Practicum Outline

The Objectiv'e of the Practicum is for the student to gradually assume more

responsibility until s(he is plannihg for and teaching the entire class or

a portion of the entire class for a half-day period. Supervision during

the practicum is provided by both the cooperating teacher and the Project

Directer.(who will bp the major evaluator). Conferences will; the Project

Director, coOperating teacher, and student wtill be scheduled on 6 weekly

,basis or as needed,during the semester.

I. Week One

A. Observation of ClassToom

1. Determine .physical layout of classroom (zones, exits, etc.),

schbol facilities, 'school personnel

2. InspectLand familiarizesoneself with

al instructional materials

b.4 curriculum guides

cl operating instructiohs for equipment

3. Emergency RroCedures

6. Observation, of class and.individual student behavior

1. Observe c lassroom schedule and routilie

2. Learn cilildren's names, grouping for instruction

3. Familiarize oneself with:4 -

a. each chilcrs medical background

` b. current :individualized programming

c. past reports and evaluations (IEP, updated reports)

4. Familiarize oneself with clipboard and ring folder system

used in classrgom.

5. Observe student, parent and teacher behavior in structured

class.room setting.

6. Observe children's behavior during free-time.

306

Page 268: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

II. Week Two

A. Hands-.on work with children. --

1. Obsecve and assss ski31 level of one infant an.d two toddlers

in a oiven'area.

2. Determine instructional approach (without teacher's guidance).

3. Dekergrine possible reinforcers; use.of antecedent events.

4. Determimethod of instructional evaluation..

5. Implemen program with two students (toddlers).

B. Spend on morning with Physical Therapist

C. Classroom Management

. 1. Review position.ing and handling recommendations for one

infant and two toddlers with Phystea) Therapist

2. Review classroom management techniques observed and discuss

With cookrating teacher (for all children in classroom)-.^

3. Fami31iarize oneself with:

a) programs being'run in classroom

b) data systems being used in classroom1

c) home programs

4. Review clip board and ring folder system.

5. Assistance in free,play time with individual children and in

. small group activities.

6. Preparation of teaching materials.

III. Week Three

A. Continue to familiarize oneself with classroom schedule and

activities.

B. Clas'sroom Management

1. Implement at least three programs with small group (teacher

prepared).

2. Review positioning and handling recommendations for

AO4 all children.

a. Assist in implementing teacher prepared large group activity.

4. Continue other classroom management activities begun in

previous week.

C. Meet with cooperating 'teacher for informal evaluation.

Page 269: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

IV. Week Four and,Pive.

' A. Continue implementation of supervising teacher's prepared small

group activities.

B. Begin planning.(with supervising.teacher) an activity incorporating

goals in one or two *skill areas, for' small group.A

C. Familiarize self with snack time operation.

D. Assist in large or small group Gross Motor Activity Iplanned

by teacher or Physical Therapist)..

V. Week Six

. A. Supervise s'nack time operation'..'

B. Discuss small grourinstruCtion planned independently with.

supervising teacher and implement.

C. Plan and'implement a largq.gr small group. Gross Motor Activity

(with input from Teacher or Physical Therapist).:

b. '-tontinue implementation of .small groups prepared by supervisory

teacher.

E. Attendance at home visit.

F. Plan and implement a group activity for tHe Infant classeS

(with input from teacher).. A

1,*I. Week Seven and Eight

A. Plan and implement a lai.ge group activity (with input from

supervising teacher and Physical Therapist).

B. Plan and implement a Fine Motor activity and a Communication

activity (with input from supervising racher and Physical Therapist).

C. Contifte implementation of small group activities prepared by

supervising teache'r.

D. Mid-Term Evaluation.

VII. Week Nine and Ten

A. Plan one morninglaith edt$re toddler class independently,:utilizing

,other staff members and teacher as observer. '

B. Continue plahning selected small group activities.

C. Attendance at a Parent Med.ing.

f

Page 270: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

VI Week El even

Plan all mornings for entire toddler class.

. .1. Teacher as observer

B. Continue planning selected small ,grourttivities.

C. Plan for b4h Infant classes.

IX. Week Twelve and Thirfeen

A. Plan all mornings for entire toddler class.

1. Plan One morning utilizing teacher and other staff members.

2. PIan two mornings witll teacYfer out of classroom, making

only spot observatipns,

Plan for both Infant classes.

C. Assess student teachinglexperience.

I .

303eA

qt.

Page 271: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

'6

FACTOR*RATED

,

RATING ASSIGNED

r

5. Sets reasonable behavioral objectives i 2 3 4 5 '1

45. Programming for individual academic

behaviors 1 2 4 3 4' 5

7. Programming for individual social

behaviors 1 2 3 4 5

8. Programing for group academic

behaviors 1 2 3 4 '5

9. Programming.for group social behaviors 1 2 3 4 5

10. Uses programs that are appropriate .1 2 3 4 5

11. -Uses programs that are efficient 1 2 3 4 5

12. Ability to carry out designed programs 1 2 3 4 5

13. EvaluatidW of programs 1 2 3 4 5

14. Planning for aides and/or para-

professionals 1 2 3 4. 5 ,

15. Vocal presentation appropriate 1 2 3 4 5

16. Reinforces appropriately 1 2 3 4 5

17. Uses effective reinforcers 1 2 3 4 5

-18. Is i-einforced by students' performances 1 2 3 4 5

19. General knowledge of academic mal....v..ials 1 2, $ 4 5

Selection of academic materials 1 2 4 rJ

.20.21. Utilization of materials 1 ,2 3 i 4 5

22. Utilization of time 1 2 3 4 rJ

23. Ability to administer classroom tests 1 2 3 ,4 5

24. Classroom control ..) 2 3 4 5

25. Classroom enginnering (seating

arrangements, etc.) .1 3 4 5

26. Follow-through on established

programs.

,

1 2 3 4 5

27. Consistency 1 . 2 3 4 5

C. ADDITIONAL COMMENTS

3 t

Page 272: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Student Teacher

Cooperating Teacher

'Date

EVALUATION

Rate by circling the appropriate number:,

(1) Excellent (2) Good (3) Satisfactory (4) Fair, 4

(5) Needs Help,

FACTOR RATEDRATING ASSIGNED

A. GENERAL ATTITUDE

1. "Enthusiasm" fo'r teaching

2. Ability cpr self-evaluation

3. Accepts responsibility -

4. Adjusts to new situations

5. Exhibits initiative

6. Reaction to criticism ,

7. Asks relevant questions about students

and their behaviors

8. Asks relevant questions about techniques

and methodology .used in class.

9, Consistent daily preparation

10. Performanceunderstress(crisis situations)

11. interaction with colleagues in non-

instructional setting

12. Interaction with colleagues

professionally.13. Interaction with parents

14. Interaction with students in free

(unstructured) time

B. CLASSROOM PERFORMANCE

1. Uses varied, stimulating learning

situations2. Gives clear, concise directions

3. Identificati-on of behaviors for

modification4. Collection of data

1 2 3 4 5$

1 2 3 1 . 5' '

1 2 3 4 5 '

1' 2 3 4 5.

1 2 3 4 ,5

1 2 3 4 6m

1 -2 \ 3 4 5

1 2 3. 4..

1 2 3 4 5

.

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 5

1 2 3 4 . 5

1 2. 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 51

a

* adapted from "Madison Metropolitan School Districts Early Childhobd

Studeint Trainitng Program".

4

Page 273: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

Appendix H

HANSON, M.J . A model for early intervention wi thcul tura 1 ly i dverse single and mul tiparent fami 1 ies .TECSE, 1981, 1(3) I 37-44

..

"'"\

Page 274: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

. .1

A model for early intervention withculturally diverse single and multiparent

families

4.

Marci J. Hanson, Ph.D.DirectorSan Francisco Infant ProgramAssistant ProfessorDepartment of Special EducationSan Francisco State UniversitySan Francisco, California

Maria, a 14-month-old infant, was referred toan early intervention program at 7 months of agebecause she was exhibiting -nuscle stiffness anddevelOpmental delay probably linked to birthcomplications. At the urging of the family pedia-trician and because of Marie's extreme irritabili-ty. her parents agreed to consider pursuing inter-vention services. Finding appropriate serviceswas a difficult task, since membera of this Latinfamiiy speak only Spanish and because bothparents are unempioyed and with limited finan-cial resources. The parents also have two otheryoung children in' the home, one of whom isMaria's twin. A program was located that offeredservices at no coat to the family in their nativelanguage. Though Maria's mother ahowadesire to participate in the early interventionprogram and expresses her thanks for the assis-tance ahe receives, she frequently ia unable tobe involved becauae of reported restrictionsplaced on her by her husband. (She also hasreported being verbally and physically abusedby her husband.) The staff of the early interven- ,tion program is working with a number of socialservice agencies in the city to secure appropri-ate and comprehensive services ix Maria andher family.

TECSE. 1981, 1(3). 37410271-1214/81/0013-003782.000 1981 Aspen Systerru Corporation

313

37

Page 275: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

TOPIcS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD SPECIAL EDUCATION / OCTOAER 1981

38 Shurell is a 2V2-year-old toddter in the earlyintervention program. Her happy disposition and

well-develoged social skills ensure positiveinteractions with her peers and teachers. Shurell

has been diagnosed as hemiplegic and shows a

definite need for therapy and, training, particu-

larly in motor and language development. Her

father, an unemployed disabled Vietnam veter-

an, is a single parent. As her primary care giver,

he brings her to school three timea a week and

performs training activities with her al home on a

daily basis. Shurell appears to be benefiting

from her father's teaching and their-involvement

in the early education program, as indicated by

her developmental gains.

Humberto and Stiirley were required by a court

order to enroll their son, Frankie, in an interverk

tion program. Frankie is a severely multiply'handicapped 2-year-old, whose disabilities ale

linked to a head injury at 4 months of age due to

alleged child,abuse. Frankie's health is good,

and no other accidents or injuries have occurred.

Frankie attends the program with one or both

parents: However, participation is somewhat

irregular, reportedly owing to family ilifficulties.

The family lives in the home of Humberto's moth-

er, who is Latin and Spanish-spesking. Shirley

has become proficient in Spanish, since thelanguage is spoken at home. Humberto and Shir-

ley report marital difficulties, and Shirley periodi-

cally leaves the home. Frankie's grandmother

assumes major responsibility for basic care-giving tasks (e.g., feeding, bathing). Shirley inui-

cates that she is excluded from care-giving

responsibilities; Humberto reports that she isincompetent and unwilling to perform theseresponsibilities. Given the volatile nature of the

family structure, the intervention saaft works

closely with all family members and with other

agencies serving this family to ensure compre-

hensive and consistent care for Frankie.

Amy's established, middle-class familyboasts that all members of the immediate family

live close by. Amy was born prematurely 3 years

ago at approximately 26-weeks gestational age.

Her birth was surrounded by severe complica-

tions necessitating hospitalization durin the 3months following her birth. At 13 months she was

,

referred by a pediatrioian.to an early intervention

program with the accompanying diagnosrs ofdiplegia, visual impairments (retrolental fibrqpla-

sia), and general developmental delay. Amy's

parents have been hry active in the infant andtoddler program, attending parent meetings andworkshops, bringing Amy to the program regular-

ly, and performing learning activities with her on

41 daily basis at home. Arriy's grandmother,uncle, and lther are to be applauded for theirtraining efforts when Amy's mother was confined

i8 lied with her second high-risk pregnancy. The ..btrd work of this family is reflected by the gains

AVny has made across all areas of development.

(Note: The names and identifying family char-

acteristics of the actual families on which these

Cese study examples are based have been

changed.)

THEgafour families participate in the

same Intervention program for develop-mentally delayed infants and toddlers. The

brief case studies highlight the tremendousAiversity of families served by a typical earlyintervention program in a large metropolitan

area. How does one program accommodatediverse families, each of whom represents awide range of needs and priorities?

A model for parent involvement thatfeatures four components for serving variousfamilies is implemented through the SanFrancisco Infant Program, a federally funded

(Office of Special Education,, Department of

Education) program for handicapped and -at-risk" children from birth to 3 years of age.

Families participating in this' early interven-

tion program are representative of the diverse

population of San Francisco; races and.

cultures represented include white, black,

Asian, and Latin families.The San Francisco Infant Program com-

bines center- (public school) and home-based

service delivery systems in a transdisciplinarymodel. Pasents (or care givers representing the

parentt) attend the program regularly withtheir children and also participate in periodic

,

\

31,4

Page 276: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

\home visits by project staff. This participationis required for a child's admission to theprogram for several reasons. First, Childrenattend the program weekly for several short

time periods, leaving the majority of thechild's time spent-in the home or at nonschoolactivities. Second, to change a child's behav-ior, training must also occur in the othersettings outside the school. Third, trainingfocuses on appropriate positioning and han-dling of children and consistent responding to

* the child's actions, necessitating the activeinvolvement of the children s care givers.

Numerous position papers and studies haveestablished the need for active parent partici-

pation in early education programs. Therationale for parent involvement provided bythese studies centers on the amount of timespent with the child, the need for consistentcaring for the child, the quality of parent/child interactions, the reinforcing value of the

parent, the cost effectiveness of parent-deliv-ered services, and the success of parents inproducing change through their trainingefforts (Brickbi & Bricker, 1976; Lillie &Trohanis: 1976; Vincent 4 Broome, 1977).

Thus parent involvement is viewed as a criti-cal component of the San Francisco Infant

Program. ,

MODEL DESCRIPTION

The San Francisco Infant Program featuresseveral components of parent involvement,including classroom instruction on infant skill

training and handling, home-training activi-ties, counseling and support services, and thepresentation of new information materials.

Training in the classroom

The focus of the center-based component of

the San Franciv,o Infant Program is on assist-

ing parents to correctly position and handletheir children, teach their children new skills,

. A MODEL FOR EARLY INTERVENTION

r

The focus of the center-basedcomponent is on assisting parents tocorrectly position and handle theirchildren, teach their children newskills, and effectively interact withtheir youngsters.

and effectively interact with their youngsters.This is accomplished through teacher/thera-pist demonstration of new techniques, system-

_atic feedback to parents on their performanceof infant training programs, and consultationwith parents on goal setting, child develop-

ment, behavior management issues, and

scheduling.-

Shortly after a child begins the program,staff and parents meet to develop an individu-alized education program plan for the child.During this meeting staff members presentthe results of initial child evaluations andclassroom observations and together with theparents develop short- and long-teirn educa-tional objectives. At this meeting parents also

develop objectives for their own involvementby indicating their needs on a Parent Involve-ment Plan (PIP). (For further information onthe PIP, see Brackman, Fundakowski, Filler,

li Peterson, 1977; Filler & Kasari, 1981.)Parent needs ranging from medical and trans-portation services to the need for it' struction inteaching infants specific skills' e identifiedon the PIP, and a contractual arringement formeeting those needs is agreed on staff and

parents. ,Since all parents desired to learn more

about teaching their children, this is the majoremphasis in the classroom. Children in theprogram are divided on the basis of chrono-logical age into two groups: infants and tod-dlers. Infant's attend school for one 3-hoursession per week, accompanied by a parent orcare giver; toddlers, such as Shurell, attend

31 n,

,

39

Page 277: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

TOPICS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD SPECIAL EDUCATION / OCTOBER 1981

.

40 school three mornings per week. Parents oftoddlers remain for the class program on twoof the, three mornings and use the third dayfor respite. During classroom time teachersand therapists meet with parents individuallyand in small groups to derive.new teachingobjectives and'plans for the children and toreview the children's,trainink programs.

The exchange of information between staffmemberrand parents is facilitated by the useof a family notebook in which all plans aredetailed. Parents perform training activities athome on a rlaily basis and collect data usingforms provided in the notebook. The datacollection system is a simple procedure inwhich a chart is produced as data arerecorded, allowing the parat to determinethrou4h visual inspectiori if the program isproilucing change. The data system used is themodel described by Hanson (1977).

Parents dre encouraged to integrate theirteaching activities into daily routines, such asdiapering and feedhig, and implement theprograms and activities throughout the daywhen the child is an alert learner. Shure Wsfather, for example, regularly brings hisdaughter to school, where he is assisted in

*developing specific programs for her. Thoughhe is rather shy and nondemonstrative, Shur-efl's progress through the training programsindicates the commitment of her father tocarrying out and recording the home activi-ties. Not all parents are regularly able to workWith their children or collect extensive infor-

mation as Shure Ws father does. Therefore thenumber and type of training activities as wellas recording procedures 2re individualized'according to each family's needs. Multilingualstaff provide information to participatingpatents from the Latin and Asian communi-ties.

Additionally, though one-to-one instructionis utilized when necessary in the toddlerprogram during classroom time, much of theinstruction is performed in small groups to

better prepare children to benefit from andsucceed in integrated preschool and kinder-garten settings when they "graduate." Inter-ested parents in the toddler gccup also receiveadditional instruction on how to plan andmanage small group activities. Parent inser-vice workshops are held periodically to trainparents in the activities at which they wish tobecome proficient. Activities range from read-ing stories to children and planning flannelboard story presentations to teaching small.groups of' childfen to discriminate and labelobjects. Thus parent participants in the San

Francisco Infant Program receive systematicinstruction in specific infant skill training fortheir child and are provided the opportunityto acquire additional skills in classroom teach-ing and managing small groups of children.

Assistance in the home 4.

The home component of the San Francisco-Infant Program also focuses on active parentinvolvement. Home visits to program familiesare periodically made by all staff members;the schedule for these visits is determined onan individual basis depending on family needand desire for home visits. On the average,families are visited once per month.

Given that family members are activelyinvolved in child teaching through the class-room component and that home-teachingprograms are developed during that time, thepurpose of visits to families at home is to

discuss special problems or concerns, reviewchild-training programs, and adapt goals andmaterials as dictated by family circumstan'cesand home settings. Certain child-trainingneeds are also more easily and appropriatelytaught in the home using the family's materi-als and following the schedule.. Working with families in their homes alsoallows staff members to better understand thefamily's cultural values and life style so thatthisinformation can be used to develop educa-

)

,

\

Page 278: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

w

tional plans for the child. In addition, if the

family is not English speaking, conversation

betweep family members and staff members,

who may be less fluent in the family's native

language or who must rely on a translator,

may be held in a less structured environment

where more individual time can be taken with

the family to fully discus:: their concerns and

receive feedback from them. For example,Maria's mother is able to more fully partici-

pate in the home than the school component .

aof the program given the restrictions placed

on her by her husband. Since she speaks Span-

ish, the home visit provides an opportunity for

her to express herself fully at a time when staff

members can focus solely on her.

The final and perhaps most important

purpose in considering a home-based compo-

nent to an early intervention program is the

involvement of pach family member. A home

visit is an opportunity for staff members to

meet with siblings and a parent or parents

who are unable to meet during the classroom

day because of their schedule. The home visit

program component was of special value to

Amy's family, for instanCe, when all family

members had to work together to. ensure

Amy's continned trainiAg at the time when

her mother's pregnancy prevented her active

involvement. As demonstrated by Amy's

family, participation by all family members in

employing Ira, g strategies and in under-

standing aspects X, the child's developmentensures more comp ete and consistent assis-

tance and response to the child.

Parent support activities

Many parents are faced 1:vith difficulties

(e.g., marital problems, serious illness, unem-

ployment), which must be alleviated before

they are ahile to become fully involved with

their child's training. Even in families free of

such stress, concerns that dictate a need for

support services may arise.

A MODEL FOR EARLY INTERVENTION

Though not adequately staffed to counsel , 41

and assist families' in many of these service

areas, the San Francisco Infant Program has

developed several strategies to accommodatefamily needs that do not directly involve thechild's education. First, one staff member, theiparent program coordinator, assumes respon-

sibility for providing direc.t assistance to

parents. This assistance varies from perform-

ing an activity with the parents (i.e., filling out

an application for services) to giving parentsinformation on available-resources such as lists

of babysitting referral agencies, national and

state agencies serving handicapped childrenand their families, and local social serviceagencies (e.g., welfare, mental health).

In addition, parent support groups meetbimonthly for an hour while children are in

the classroom. Since children are grouped by

chronological age, parents attend suppbrtgroups with other parents of children of the

same age init with different disabilities. The

content of the meeting is deterMined by the

parents. Parents of the youngest children have

used the groups as a comseling situation,exploring feelings about having a handi-capped child and devising strategies for

handling relatives' and strangers' responses to

and inquiries about the child (e.g., What do

you tell a stranger on the bus who asks why

your child doei not walk?). Parents of thetoddlers requested more structured discussions

focused on topics such as discipline or behav-

ior management and schbol placement for

children aft& graduation from the infant/toddler program. Parents' evaluations (anec-dotal feedback and responses on a parentsatisfaction questionnaire) indicate .-these

groups .are beneficial, and high attendance

rates even under difficult circumstancessuggest they are a meaningful experience.

A third support service component is the

structured review of children's programs atperiodic meetings of the infant program staff,

the parents, and all social service,a encies in.

Page 279: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

t" c,,

,

TOPICS IN EARLY CHILDHOOD SPECIAL EDUCATION /OCTOBER 1981

.1

t.

42 the community that are involved with thefamily. At these meetings, organized by theirifant program, staff members present areport on the child's development andprogress, and all agencies discuss serviceprovisions fop the family. These meetingsoften represent the first time that varioussocial service agency peisonnel have met One

another and coordinated services. For families

such as Frankie's, this coordination becomescritical as a means of ensuring adequate child

care and rhay involve additional meetings orphone calls as necessary to arrange services.Thus the San Francisco Infant Prograni servesas the broker or coordinator in finding neededservices for families and for establishing coop-erative ties and plans among agencies provid-

ing those services.

Parent workshops

Having a young child with developmentalproblems is a new experience for most parentsand is fraught with anxieties and questions..Many parents share the same need for moreinformation in specific areas. In order toprovide information to all participants in the

program and involve all family members Whomay wish to attend, the San Francisco In /antProgram sponsors a series of optional work-shops held in the evening. Workshop. topics

are chosen by families in the program andhave' included legislation and legal issues

related to school services for handicappedchildren, language development, geneticscounseling, behavior management, and com-mon medical emergencies..

As with other program componerits, staffmembers furnish multilingual written materi-als or translations as needed and facilitateparticipation by organizing services such .astransportation. Parent workshops provide asystematic and efficient method for pre-senting new information, a time for parents tosocialize and get acquainted, and also a means

of involving family members who are unableto attend daytime adivities.

STAFF RESPONSIBILITIES,

.

The staff of the San Francisco InfantProgram include the following members: ahalf-time project director, a quarter-timeparent program coordinator, and a fbll-timeeducational coordinator, teacher, and physicalltherapist. A psychologist, pediatrician, and \cOmmunication specialist also consult for theproject. Staff members are representative of

' the cultural groups served in the city and.mostare bilingual, which ensures tbat culturallydiverse populations can be served by theproject.

All staff members, regardless of their arcaof expertise, work directly with parents. Theproject emphasizes a transdisciplinary ap-proach in that each team member practices-role release! by training others in theirspecialty area. Parents are active members-ofthis team. Activities are performed by all staffmembers in the classroom and in the home.The project directoi manages the system toensure that the parents' needs are met and allstaff members and parents are activelyincluded. .

Through the Parent Involvement Plan, thestaff members of the San Francisco InfantProgram enter into an agreement with theparents to assist them with identified needs.Many components for parent involvement areoffeted to families. Theie ieclude training inthe home and classroom settings, parentsupport 'groups, referral services, workshops,and frequent counseling and discussions withfamily members. All activities are structuredto meet the needs of families from variouscultures and family constellatiqni *The InfantProgram services are evaluate by analyzingthe number of parent object is met andparent satisfaction with the services provided.

31 0

s

1

,

,

it /

Page 280: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

-

Parents, especially those of very young chil-dren, bear responsibility for almost all aspectsof the child's life. Long before schools', peers,and other social institutions exert an influence

on the developing child, parents must play themajor roles needed in raising a child. Thoughprogram goals typically focus on 'assistingparents in these roles, different parents willparticipate to various degrees, depending onfamily necds. Such factors as single parent-hood, needs of other children in the family,illness, employment, cultural factors, maritaldifficulties, or financial probleins mayinfluence the degree of any parent's involve-rnent at a given point in time.

In addition, programs must be able toaccommodate the shifting needs of families,

Long before schools, peers, and othersocial institutions exert en influence onthe developing child, parents must,playthe major roles needed in raising achild.

reflected by changes in American life style.For example, recent data compiled by the U.S.Census Bureau showed an increase from 5.6Million to 8.5 million m the number of house-holds headed by single women. This reportalso indicated that families maintained by

women with no husbands fared less welleconomically than others and had a medianincome significantly below thdt of the national

REFERENCES

13rackman, B., Fundakowslci, C., Filler, J.W., Jr., &.Peter-

son, C. Total psogramming for severely/profoundlyhandicapped young children. In B. Wilcox (Ed.),Proceedings of the Illinois Institute for Educators ofthe 'Severely/Profoundly Handicapped. Springbeld,Ill.: Illinois Office of Education. 1977.

A MODEL FOR EARLY INTERVENTION

average for all families. Thus early interven- t 43tion program models must present a flexibleapproach to type and degree of parentinvolvement.

Intervention programs, particularly those inmetropolitan areas, also must be able lo offerservices appropriate to a wide variety ofcultural/ethnic groups. In San Francisco, forexample, categorizatfbn of the population byethnic group and race from current dab, (1980U.S. Census Bureau) estimates that 11% of thepopulation is Black, 22% Asian, less than 1%Native American, 46% White, 14% SPanish-American, and 7% other ethnic groups. Froma program development perspective, issues inserving a culturally diverse population includeprovidistig services to families in their nativelanguage, acknowledging family values andpriorities dictated by the culture, and incorpo-rating training into the family's defined rolesfor parents and children (e.g., a matriarchalfamily structure wbere the mother assumes allresponsibility for-child-related activities andthe father does not actively participate).

No program can be expected to satisfy allcommunity needs. However, given the estab-lished practice that parents can and should bean integral part of an early intervention effort,models specifying levels of parent involve-ment must present a .spectrum of services tomeet parents' needs and a flexible approach tothe type and degree of parent involvement atany given point in time. The underlying prin-ciple dictating services available for parentsmast be that those services are in the best

interest of the child.

11.., ,Bricker, W.A., & Bricker, D.D. In T.D. Tjossem (Ed.),

Intervention straiegie,s for high risk infants and youngchildren. Baltimore: University Park Press, 1976.

Filler, J.W, jr., & Kasari, C. Acquisition, maintenanceandgeneralization of-parent.skills taught with two severelyhandicsepped infants. Journal of the Association for

Page 281: DOCUMENT R§SUMi - ERICObjeative 1 (see Table 1, Objective 1.1-1.4), the establishment of a combination o4assroom and homebased infant and toddler'program, was accom-plished during

TOPICS fN EARLY CHILDHOOD. SPECIAL EDUCATION / OCTOBER 1981

Severely Handicapped, 1981, 6, 30-38.

Hanson, M j. Teaching your Down's syndrome infant: A

- guide for parents. Baltimore: University Park Press,

1977.Lillie, D.L., & Trohanis, P.L. (Eds.). Teaching parents to

tea 'h. New York Walker, 1976.

1.

Vincent, 14., & Broome, K. A public school servicedelivery model for handicapped children between birth

' and five years of age. In E. Sontag (Ed.), Educational

programming for the severely and profoundly handi-capped. Reston, Va.: Division on Mental Retardation,The Council kr Exceptional Chaen, 1977.

3 1.

-4

00.

ati